korean-layout
korean-layout
Korean
133 posts
Don't wanna be here? Send us removal request.
korean-layout · 6 years ago
Text
New
새 (same spelling and pronunciation as the word for “bird”) 
새로운 and 새로.
Here are the examples used in this video: 새 집 a new house 새로 지은 집 a newly built house 오래된 집 an old house 오래된 컴퓨터 an old computer 새 컴퓨터 a new computer 새로워요. It’s new. 이거 새로워요. This is new and fresh. 새로운 접근 approach 새로운 시각 new perspective 새로운 방식/방법 new method 새 친구 new friend 새로 사귄 친구 a friend that I newly made 새 책 a new book 새로 받은 책 a book that I newly received 새 맛집 a new good restaurant 새로 찾은 맛집 a good restaurant that I newly discovered
7 notes · View notes
korean-layout · 7 years ago
Text
add
n
ords 자기 집One’s own home. 이제 From now on, now 우리 이제 친구야We are friends from now on. 우리 이제 친구 아니야.We are no longer friends. From now on, we are not friends. 오래Long time, for a long time .한참QuiteKeith: .꽤It’s been pretty long Or you can exaggerate it like 몇백 년Couple of hundred years 어떤 What kind of. 당연하다To be a matter of fact, to be expected. 당연하지.Of course standard politeness situations, you say 당연하죠 -.물론이죠Keith: 둘이서Two people together 여전히Still. 며칠Date, a few days, how many days
nouns 이 is to be different 상 is normal. 이상하다. strange 차이 Difference. 상식Common knowledge 상식이 없어 you don’t have common knowledge. 그건 상식이야.thats common knowt 정상.Normal.
영화표Movie ticket기차표 train ticket 비행기표Plane ticket 상관Relation, correlation. 이상형Ideal type. 현우씨의 이상형이 뭐예요? 행운Luck, fortune 값Price 형 also means type, shape, form 형태ShapeHyunwoo: 삼각형Triangle 사각형Rectangle. 모형A modelHyunwoo: 네, 중학교 때 모형 비행기 많이 만들었어요.I made a lot of model airplanes when I was in junior high school.
verbs 어울리다To suit someone, to go well with 그 셔츠는 어울려. You look good in that. That shirt suits you. 여자 친구랑 잘 어울린다.You look good together with your girlfriend 이름이 잘 어울린다.Your name suits you 모자가 잘 어울려요.Your hat suits you well 잘 어울린다 It looks good on you 지내다To be, to spend time. .잘 지내요. 잘 지내셨죠you’ve been well 바쁘게 지내다.I have been busy 즐겁게 지내다.I’ve been joyful
phrases 실망이야!silmangiya!I’m disappointed in you! 어, 전화 온다.The phone is ringing. 경찰 온다.The police are coming 아이스크림이 녹는다. Keith: The ice cream is melting, plain declarative.
(8)인성: 그래, 아무튼 행운을 빈다! (8)Inseong: Right. Well, good luck
무슨 상관이야?Mind Your Own Business 너랑 상관 없잖아 상관이 있다To have relations, to have correlation. 상관이 없다To not have relations, to not have correlation 소개팅이랑 돈이랑 무슨 상관이야 what does dating have to do with money
소개팅 많이 해 봤어요 did you go on many intro dates
한 턱 쏘다It’s on me 뭐라고 했어? - What did you say?
민호: 안녕하세요. 유민호라고 합니다.Hi. My name is Minho Yu, im called minho yu
이거 뭐라고 해요? (What do you call this?) 한국어로 뭐라고 해요? (How do you say that in Korean?) ’ 일요일'은 영어로 뭐라고 해요? (How do you say “일요일” in English?) 시계라고 해요.It’s called a clock. 가라고 해요. - Tell (someone) to go.
)민호: 유리 씨, 뭐 드실래요? (7)Minho: Yuri, what would you like to eat?
나한테 영화표가 두 장 있는데, 내일까지야have two movie tickets, and they re  till tomorrow
grammar
between, only with, among - -끼리Among.exclusionary, 친구끼리 돈이 문제니? (Money is not a problem between friends, is it?) - 가족끼리 여행 갈 거야. (I’m going to go on a trip with my family members only.) - 같은 반 친구들끼리 앉았어. (We sat just with other students in the same class.) - 친구들끼리만 아는 이야기야. (It’s a story that I only share with my friends 한국 사람들끼리Among Korean people. 그리고 미국 사람들끼리Among American people.
종이 1장Paper, one sheet of paper.
(아/어/여 줘서 고마워요 아/어/여 주셔서 고마워요
(3)지혜: 다들 와 줘서 고마워! (Everyone, thanks for coming.) (5)지혜: 인성 오빠도 와 줘서 정말 고마워요. (Inseong, thanks a lot for coming, too.)
————————— ♣ More Examples ♣ ————————— - 도와 줘서 고마워. (Thanks for helping me.) - 말해 줘서 고마워. (Thanks for telling me.) - 들어 줘서 고마워. (Thanks for listening to me.) - 도와 주셔서 고마워요. (Thank you for helping me.) - honorific - 말씀해 주셔서 고마워요. (Thanks for telling me.) - honorific - 들어 주셔서 고마워요. (Thanks for listening to me.) - honorific Keith: 저를 사랑해 줘서 고마워요. thank you for loving me
xhante be thankful to
- 여기에서 일한 지 3달 됐어요. (It’s been three months since I started working here.) - 한국에 온 지 오래 됐어요. (It’s been a long time since I came to Korea.) - 담배 끊은 지 1주일 됐어요. (It’s been one weeks since I quit smoking.)
3 notes · View notes
korean-layout · 7 years ago
Text
Uncertainity
U
-N-처럼 보이다 Ncheorom boida looks like noun
학생처럼 보여요. = He looks like a student.
비둘기처럼 보이네요. = It looks like a pigeon.
경찰처럼 보이는 사람이 그 여자를 데려갔어요. = Someone who looks like a cop took her.
-DV 아/어/여 보이다   Looks ...
Descriptive Verb + (아/어/여) 보이다
그 사람이 행복해 보이다that person Seems happy. 근데 이거 비싸 보이는데? (But this looks expensive. 문제가 어려워 보여.That problem looks difficult- 건물이 높아 보이다.- 높아 보여요. = the building looks high. Keith는 즐거워 보이다.Keith looks excited, joyful and merry. - 행복해 보입니다 = (he/she/they/you) look(s) happy. 멋있어 보여요.Ah she looks cool
* 보이다 is originally the passive voice of 보다, to see.
Difference (아/어/여) 보이다 and ㄴ/은/는 것 같다
Examples
학생 = student 학생처럼 보여요. = He looks like a student. 학생 같아요. = he seems to be student.
이 영화는 재미없어 보여요 = This movie looks boring. 이 영화는 재미없는 것 같아요 = this movie seems boring.
사장님 기분이 안 좋아 보이는데, 무슨 일 있어요? = The boss doesn’t look happy. Is there anything wrong? 사장님 기분이 안 좋은 것 같은데, 무슨 일 있어요? =(you’re guessing or thinking based on either what you saw or some other clues)  i think the boss is upset the boss seems upset. Is there anything wrong? 
N 같아요 [ga-ta-yo] is like Noun
저 사람은 로봇 같아요. [jeo sa-ram-eun ro-bot ga-ta-yo.]  That person is like a robot.
경은 씨는 천사 같아요. [gyeong-eun ssi-neun cheon-sa ga-ta-yo.] Kyeong-eun is like an angel.
현우 씨는 천재 같아요. [hyeo-nu ssi-neun cheon-jae ga-ta-yo.] = Hyunwoo seems to be a genius.
거짓말 같아요. [geo-jit-mal ga-ta-yo] = It seems to be a lie
그 이야기는 거짓말 같아요. [geu i-ya-gi-neun geo-jit-mal ga-ta-yo.] = That story sounds like a lie.
저 사람 소연 씨 같아요. [jeo sa-ram so-yeon ssi ga-ta-yo.] = That person looks like So-yeon.
로봇 같아요. [ro-bot ga-ta-yo] =  It seems to be a robot. / I think it’s a robot
-A eun geos , V neun geos gatayo seems like + verb
-DV/AV ㄴ/은/는 것 같다[-n/eun/neun geot gatda].I “it seems…”
Formation
Descriptive verbs-                                -ㄴ/은 것 같다 Action verbs Present -는 것 같다 Past -ㄴ/은것 같다  Futureㄹ/을 것 같다
ida is conjugated like descriptive verb
Conjugation part
것 같다 것 같아 (basic) 것 같아요 (standard) 것 같습니다 (formal)
I.Descriptive Verbs
Verb Stem-ㄴ/은 것 같다
vowel + -ㄴ 것 같다
편하다[pyeonhada]: “to be comfortable” 편한 것 같다[pyeonhan geot gatda]: “it seems to be comfortable” or “I think (it) is comfortable.”
비싸다[bissada]: “to be expensive” 비싼 것 같다[bissan geot gatda]: “it seems to be expensive” or “I think (it) is expensive.”
예쁘다[yeppeuda]: “to be pretty” 예쁜 것 같다[yeppeun geot gatda]: “it seems to be pretty” or “I think (it) is pretty.”
이상한 것 같아요 = It seems to be strange. / I think it’s strange.
consonant + -은 것 같다
많다[manta]: “to be many” 많은 것 같다[maneun geot gatda]: “it seems like there are many” or “(I) think there are many.”
적다[jeokda]: “to be a little” 적은 것 같다[jeogeun geot gatda]: “it seems like there are a little” or “(I) think there are a little.”
II..Action Verbs
Present Tense / Verb Stem + -는 것 같다
이야기하는 것 같아요 = I think they are talking. / They seem to talk to each other
오다[oda]: “to come” 오는 것 같다[oneun geot gatda] i think he comes
모르다[moreuda]: “to not know” 모르는 것 같다[moreuneun geot gatda]: “I think he doesn’t know.”
도착하다[do-chakhada]: “to arrive” 도착하는 것 같다[dochakhaneun geot gatda]: “I think he arrives.”
사다[sada]: “to buy” 사는 것 같다[saneun geot gatayo]:“I think he buys.”
Past Tense / Verb Stem ㄴ 것 같다
이야기한 것 같아요 = I think they told them. / It seems like they talked.
오다[oda]: “to come”   온 것 같다[on geot gatda]: “I think he came”
모르다[moreuda]: “to not know”   모른 것 같다[moreun geot gatda]: “I think he didn’t know.”
도착하다[do-chakhada]: “to arrive” 도착한 것 같다[dochakhan geot gatda]: “I think he arrived.”
사다[sada]: “to buy” 산 것 같다[san geot gatayo]:“I think he bought.”
Future Tense /Verb Stem ㄹ/을 것 같다
이야기할 것 같아요 = I think they will talk. / It seems like they will talk.
l verbs omit l
except
The verbs 걷다(to walk), 듣다(to listen), 묻다(to ask), 싣다(to load) are changed to 걸을/들을/물을/실을 + 것 같다
오다[oda]: “to come”   올 것 같다[ol geot gatda]: “I think he will come”
모르다[moreuda]: “to rise”   모를 것 같다[moreul geot gatda]: “I think he will know.”
도착하다[do-chakhada]: “to arrive” 도착할 것 같다[dochakhal geot gatda]: “I think he will arrive.”
사다[sada]: “to buy” 살 것 같다[sal geot gatayo]:“I think I’ll buy it.”
neun geos , review 
1. Descriptive verbs Verb stem + -(으)ㄴ 것
Ex) 예쁘다 [ye-ppeu-da] = to be pretty 예쁜 것 [ye-ppeun geot] = being pretty, something pretty, the thing that is pretty
2. Action verbs -
Present tense Verb stem + -는 것
말하다 [mal-ha-da] = to talk, to speak, to say 말하는 것 [mal-ha-neun geot] = talking, what one is saying, the act of talking
Past tense Verb stem + -(으)ㄴ 것
말한 것 [mal-han geot] = what one said, the fact that one talked -
Future tense Verb stem + -(으)ㄹ 것 말할 것 [mal-hal geot] = what one will say, the fact that one will talk
Sentences
I.Descriptive Verbs
아저씨 집은 비싼 것 같아요. Ajeossi jip-eun bissan geot gatayo. Mister, your house seems to be expensive.
성민은 수줍어하는 것 같아. Seongmin-eun sujubeohaneun geot gata. Seongmin seems to be shy.
현철은 바쁜 것 같다. Hyeoncheol-eun bappeun geot gatta. HyeonCheol seems to be busy.
여기 비싼 것 같아요. [yeo-gi bi-ssan geot ga-ta-yo.] = I think this place is expensive. = It looks expensive here. = This place seems to be expensive.
그런 것 같아요. [geu-reon geot ga-ta-yo.] = I think so. = It seems to be so. = It looks like it. ** Verb = 그렇다 (irregular) = to be so, to be that way
이 영화 재미있을 것 같아요. [i yeong-hwa jae-mi-i-sseul geot ga-ta-yo] = I think this movie will be interesting. = This movie looks like it will be interesting (to watch).
이게 더 좋은 것 같아요. [i-ge deo jo-eun geot ga-ta-yo.] = I think this is better.
(Negation) 오스틴은 아픈 것 같지 않다. Oseutin-eun apeun geot gatji. anhda Austin does not seem to be hurt.
오스틴은 아프지 않은 것 같다. Oseutin-eun apeuji aneun geot gatda. Austin seems like he is not hurt.
ida
이거 뭐인 것 같아요? [i-geo mwo-in geot ga-ta-yo?] = What do you think this is?
II.Action Verbs
Present Tense
그녀는 오는 것 같아요. Geunyeoneun oneun geot gatayo. “I think she comes.”
Past Tense
아들이 온 것 같어. Adeuri on geot gateo. “I think my son came.”
도착한 것 같아요. Dochakhan geot gatayo. “I think we’ve arrived..”
누가 한 것 같아요? [nu-ga han geot ga-ta-yo?] = Who do you think did it?
4. 이 가방, 여기에서 산 것 같아요. [i ga-bang, yeo-gi-e-seo san geot ga-ta-yo.] = This bag, it seems like we bought it here. = I think I bought this bag here.
Future Tense
- 오다 ▶ 저는 내일도 올 것 같아요. (I think I’m going to come tomorrow as well.)
.재미있을 것 같은데요? (I think it’ll be fun.)
5. 아마 안 할 것 같아요. [a-ma an hal geot ga-ta-yo.] = I think I probably won’t do it. = It looks like we are probably not going to do it.
멋있을 것 같아요.I think she would be cool 같이 가면 좋을 것 같아요.If we went together, I think it would be good. 그럴 것 같아요" which means “I assume so.” or “I guess it will be so
살 것 같아요.sal geot gatayo.“I think I’ll buy it.”
곧 도착할 것 같아요. [god do-chak-hal geot ga-ta-yo.]    I think I’ll arrive soon
그는 내일 올 것 같아요. I think he will come tomorrow as well.
이 카페 곧 닫을 것 같아요. I think this cafe is going to close soon.
저는 5시에도 여기에 있을 것 같아요..I think I’ll still be here at 5.
6시에는 여기에 없을 것 같아요. .I think he won’t be here at 6.
올 것 같아 I think he will come 올 것 같아요 I think he will come 올 것 같습니다 I think he will come
Tenses
벌써 한 것 같아요. [beol-sseo han geot ga-ta-yo.] = I think (they/he/she/I/you) already did it. 지금 하는 것 같아요. [ji-geum ha-neun geot ga-ta-yo.] = I think (someone) does/is doing it now. 내일 할 것 같아요. [nae-il hal geot ga-ta-yo.] = I think (someone) will do it tomorrow.
notes
것 + 같다 [gat-da] on its own means “to be the same” when it is used with other nouns, it means “it is like
학생 같아요. [hak-saeng ga-ta-yo.] =  You look like a student. 저 사람 한국 사람 같아요. [han-guk sa-ram ga-ta-yo.] = He looks like a Korean person.
것이다 is often replaced with 거다. It is a pronunciation change that occurs in natural conversation.
- 었/았/였던 것 같다neun (eu)n , (eu)l deon geos gatda   It seems - 1.  You can also use it when you have an unclear memory about a past situation. (Often used when talking about when you were younger). 2. Looking at an ancient painting or artifact and trying to make suppositions about how people lived/events that happened a long time ago. 3Making a guess about someone else’s mood in a past situation 4. Making a guess about a previous situation based on the circumstances.
Can be used with not only verbs but also nouns; N이었던/였던 것 같다
-ㄴ/-은 는 감이 있다-n, eun,neun  gami issda   Feel like to seem somewhat….
Formation
Descriptive Verbs  V -ㄴ/은 감이 있다: Action Verbs
I. Descriptive Verbs
vowel - ㄴ 감이 있다
크다[Keuda]: “to be big” 큰 감이 있다[keun gami itda]: “It’s somewhat big” or “I feel that it is a bit big”
비싸다[bissada]: “to be expensive” 비싼 감이 있다[Bissan gami itda]: ” or “I feel that it is a bit expensive”
consonant -은 감이 있다
작다[jakda]: “to be small” 작은 감이 있다[jageun gami itda]:“It’s somewhat small” or “I feel that it is a bit small”
짧다[jjaltta]: “ to be short” 짧은 감이 있다[jalbeun gami itda]:“It’s somewhat short” or “I feel that it is a bit short”
Sentences
영화가 좀 너무 단순한 감이 있어. Yeonghwa-ga jom neomu dansunhan gam-i isseo. - This movie is somewhat too simple.
저 선생님 수업은 지겨운 감이 있어서 싫어요. Jeo seonsaengnim sueop-eun jigyeoun gam-i isseoseo ireoyo. - That teacher’s class is kind of boring so I don’t like it.
좀 늦은 감이 있지만… Jom neujeun gam-i itjiman. - Although I feel that it’s a bit late…
이 배우는 연기력이 부족한 감이 있어요. I baeu-neun yeongiryeok-i bujokan gam-i isseoyo - I feel that this actor is lacking some acting skills.
바가지 쓰는 감이 있지만, 그냥 살래. Bagaji sseuneun gam-i itjiaman, geunyang sallae. - I kind of feel that it’s a rip-off, but I’ll still buy it.
100 bolimyeon jogeum bissan gami issneyo i feel like 100 dollars was a bit too expensive
haru jeone yeyag haneun geoseun neujeun gami issseubnida i feel like is too late to make a reservation one day before
Notes
감[gam] comes from the Chinese character (感), which means feeling, therefore the phrase is translated like “I feel that it is …” or “I think it’s kind of …
-을거예요(eu)l geoyeyo  I think, I guess I suppose, I think
-ㄹ/을 거야[-l /eul geoya] -ㄹ/을거예요(eu)l geoyeyo -ㄹ/을 겁니다[-l / eul geomnida].
This is the same form as the intentional, but is not of the same meaning. While the intentional expresses an intention or a plan to do something in the future, here, when this grammatical structure can express a suppositive or assumptive statement about all tenses.
Formation ▶ Future / Present Tense
vowel -ㄹ 거야 -ㄹ/을거예요(eu)l geoyeyo or  - ㄹ 겁니다
가다[gada] – “to go”
갈 거야[gal geoya] - intimate
갈 거예요[gal geo-yeyo] - standard
갈 겁니다[gal geomnida] - formal
he will probably go there
consonant + -을 거야  or  - 을 겁니다
잡다[japda] – “to catch”
잡을 거야[jabeul geoya] - intimate
잡을 거예요[jabeul geo-yeyo] - standard
잡을 겁니다[jabeul geomnida] - formal
“I will probably catch…”
Verb stems ending with ㄹ + -거야  or  - 겁니다
▶ Past Tense
- Verb stem of the past form + -을 거야 or -을 겁니다
가다[gada] – “to go”   갔다[gatda]: “went”
갔을 거야[gatseul geoya] - intimate
갔을 거예요[gatseul geo-yeyo] - standard
갔을 겁니다[gatseul geomnida] - formal
“(He) probably went…”
잡다[japda] – “to catch”   잡았다[jabatda]: "caught”
잡았을 거야[jabatseul geosida](intimate)
잡았을 거예요[jabatseul geo-yeyo] (standard)
잡았을 겁니다[jabatseul geomnida] (formal)
“(He) probably caught”
너는 모를 거야. Neo-neun moreul geo-ya. - I probably don’t know.
한 시간 정도 걸릴 거야. Han sigan jeong-do geolril geo-ya. - I guess it’ll take about an hour.
집에 갔을 거야! Jib-e gatseul geoya! - She probably went home.
엄마는 놀랐을 거야. Eomma-neun nollasseul geo-ya. - I think my mom was surprised.
나도 내일 영화볼거야. nado naeil yeonghwa bol geoya. “I’m going to watch a movie tomorrow
나도 내일 영화 볼 거야. Nado naeil yeonghwa bol geoya. "I will probably watch a movie tomorrow, too.”
-gessneyo/ gesseoyo   You must be
-겠- You can use -겠- to ask someone’s intention, to express what you are going to do, to talk about something that will happen, to show your assumption about something, or to talk about possibilities or capabilities. It is also often used in fixed expressions such as 처음 뵙겠습니다 (= Nice to meet you.) and 잘 먹겠습니다 (= Thank you for the food.).
1. -시겠어요? / -시겠습니까? = “Would you …?” “Would you like to …?” This usage is only used in very formal Korean. In more casual Korean, you would use -(으)ㄹ래 (요)? (Review Level 4 Lesson 2 for this grammar point). The honorific suffix -시- is always used with -겠- in this usage.
어디로 가시겠어요? [eo-di-ro ga-si-ge-sseo-yo?] = Where would you like to go? Similar: 어디로 갈래(요)?
2. -겠- (used to express one’s intention) = I’m going to …, I’d like to … Mostly used in formal Korean, -겠- can also express one’s intention to do something. In more casual Korean, the same meaning can be expressed through -(으)ㄹ게(요) (Review Level 3 Lesson 6 for this grammar point).
Ex) 제가 하겠습니다. [ je-ga ha-ge-sseum-ni-da] = I’ll do it. 말하지 않겠습니다. [ma-ra-ji an-ke-sseum-ni-da] = I won’t tell you.
3. -겠- (used to express one’s opinion/idea/assumption) = I think, I guess, I assume This is the most common usage of -겠- in casual and everyday conversation in Korean. You can use -겠- to show your opinion or assumption about something or what will happen, but you also give a nuance that you are somewhat careful with your opinion.
Ex) 이게 좋겠어요. [i-ge jo-ke-sseo-yo.] = I think this will be good
4. -겠- used in fixed expressions In addition to the usages above, -겠- is also commonly used in some fixed expressions. Ex) 알겠습니다. [al-ge-sseum-ni-da.] = I got it. I understand.
Ex) 모르겠어요 [mo-reu-ge-sseo-yo.] = I don’t get it. I don’t know. I am not sure.
V-na boda   tt 5 4 A(eu)n ga boda It looks like hk 109      tt5 5
we learned that 것 같다 can be used to say that something seems like something else. It can be used to speculate about or give an uncertain opinion on something in the past, present, or future. Today, we will look at a similar structure.
This is different from 것 같다 in that 것 같다 does not necessarily require the speaker to have observed something to use as the basis of their statement. Let’s learn how to use them.
-(으)ㄴ가 보다 -(으)ㄴ가 보다 can be used with descriptive verbs only in the present tense and with both descriptive and action verbs in the future tense. For the present tense, simply attach -은가 보다 to verb roots ending with consonants and -ㄴ가 보다 to roots ending with vowels. For the future tense, apply the future tense -(으)ㄹ 것이다 to the verb root and then add -(으)ㄴ가 보다 to that. It will come out looking like -(으)ㄹ 것인가 보다 or, to shorten it up, -(으)ㄹ 건가 보다.
PRESENT:
아연 씨는 보통은 고기를 잘 먹는데 오늘은 거의 안 먹네요. 배가 아픈가 봐요. (Ayeon usually loves meat [eats meat well] but today she’s hardly eating. It looks like she has a stomachache. 정원 씨는 시험을 치르는 데 3시간 다 필요했는데 호찬 씨는 1시간 안에 문제를 다 푼 데다가 점수가 잘 나왔어요. 머리가 엄청 좋은가 봐요. (Jeongwon needed the full three hours for the test, but Hochan finished within an hour and got a good score. It looks like he’s really smart [It looks like his head is really good].) FUTURE:
유정 씨는 오래 전부터 언젠가 미국여행 가겠다고 노래 불렀어요*. 요즘 돈을 많이 모으고 영어를 열심히 공부하고 있는 걸 보니 드디어 갈 건가 봐요. (Yujeong has been saying for a long time that she will travel to the US eventually. Seeing how she’s saving money and studying English hard, it looks like she will finally go.) 일기예보를 듣고 보니 내일도 정말 무더울 건가 봐요. (Listening to the weather report, it looks like tomorrow will be really muggy too.) *노래를 부르다— While this usually means “to sing (a song),” it is also used as an expression meaning that someone says something over and over.
-나 보다 -나 보다 is used for action verbs in the past and present tense, AND for descriptive verbs in the past tense. It can not be used with the future tense.
PAST:
학교 축구장은 진흙밭이 다 됐네요. 비가 많이 왔나 봐요. (The school soccer field turned into a mud pit. It looks like it rained a lot.) 아이들이 선생님의 퍼즐을 잘 못 풀었어요. 너무 어려웠나 봐요. (The children couldn’t solve the teacher’s puzzle. It looks like it was too difficult.)
PRESENT:
동생의 방에서 코 고는 소리가 들려요. 낮잠을 자고 있나 봐요. (The sound of snoring is coming from my younger brother’s room. It looks like he’s napping.) 요리법을 읽고 보니 이거 만드는 데 40분이나 걸리나 봐요. 우리 시간이 있어요? (Looking at the recipe, it looks like it takes about 40 minutes to make this. Do we have time?)
-na haessda  s.unten -V + 는/ㄴ/은 + 가 했다(eu)n ga haessda I thought that  not found
Verb + 나 했다  : This pattern is equivalent to the phrase I wondered why/where/how ~
왜 그 여자가 화가 났나 했어.  I wonder why that girl got angry 영화가 몇 시에 시작하나 했어.I wonder when the movie starts. 어젯밤 왜 날 안 전화했나 했어. I wonder why he didn’t call last night. 왜 그 여자가 울고 있었나 했어요. I wonder why that girl was crying.
~(으)ㄴ걸(요)-(eu)l  geolyo   I bet, think
noun ~인걸(요) = verb ~(으)ㄴ걸(요),
열쇠는 니가 가진걸, 나한테 왜 물어봐? = you have the keys, why are you asking me? 너무 늦게 왔어. 표가 다 팔린걸 = I came too late. The tickets were all sold out . 저는 정신이 멀쩡한 걸요 = I’m as sober as I can be. 왜 나를 떠나? 너는 나의 처음이자 마지막인걸 = Why are you leaving me? You are my first and last.
~(으)ㄹ 걸 (그랬다) = shows regret 공부를 더 열심히 할 걸 = I should have studied more. 나도 생일파티에 갈걸 그랬다 = If only I went to the party. 그 여자한테 전화번호를 물어볼 걸 그랬다 = I wish I asked her phone number. 미안해. 너한테 미리 말을 할 걸 = Sorry. I should have told you before. 학교에 안올걸 = I wish I did not came to school. 그 영화 재밌어? 나도 같이 볼걸 그랬다 = Is the movie good? I wish I watched it with you, too.
~(으)ㄹ걸요, ~았/었을걸요 = unconfirmed assumption or proposition, probably
(*this is use only in speaking with friends, never written)
진영 씨는 똑똑할걸요 = JinYoung is probably pretty smart 드라마 배우 일걸요 = He’s probably a drama star. 여기에 앉을걸 = I guess you could sit here. 그 분은 게을렀을걸요 = He was probably just lazy. 책을 읽었을걸요 = I probably read that book. 그 책은 외국 학생이 읽기에 좀 어려울걸요 = I guess that book probably will be difficult for foreign student to read.
-(eu)l ggayo?Do you think
s. intentions
-(eu)l jido moreudaNot sure if
Adjective/Verb + (으)ㄹ지도 모르다: This pattern is equivalent to the phrase ‘it might ~’ or 'it may ~.’
비가 올지도 몰라요 It might rain 시험에 떨어질지도 몰라. It might fail the exam. 지은이는 도서관에 있지도 몰라.  JiEun may be in library.
-(eu)l  tende   I guess that hk 100
Iyou learned that sentences in this form most likely end with the final verb being conjugated in this form: ~았/었을 것이다.
날씨가 좋았더라면 저는 공원에 갔을 거예요 = If it was nice out, I would have gone 날씨가 좋았더라도 저는 공원에 안 갔을 거예요  = Even if it was nice out, I still wouldn’t have gone
제가 돈이 있었더라면 그것을 샀을 거예요 = If I had money, I would have bought that 제가 돈이 있었더라도 그것을 안 샀을 거예요 = Even if I had money, I wouldn’t have bought that
In each of these cases, whenever you have an “if” or “even if” sentence in the past, followed by a clause that would have happened (or not happened), you can replace 거예요 with 텐데(요). For example:
날씨가 좋았더라면 저는 공원에 갔을 텐데요 = If it was nice out, I would have gone 날씨가 좋았더라도 저는 공원에 안 갔을 텐데요  = Even if it was nice out, I still wouldn’t have gone
제가 돈이 있었더라면 그것을 샀을 텐데요 = If I had money, I would have bought that 제가 돈이 있었더라도 그것을 안 샀을 텐데요 = Even if I had money, I wouldn’t have bought that
This can also be done when the “if/even if” sentence is in the present tense as well, but only if the second clause is a supposition that would happen if the first clause were true. For example:
내가 돈이 있으면 그것을 살 텐데 = I would buy that if I had money
When 텐데 is used in a sentence, it is done because the speaker has a certain feeling that he/she wants to express. It is very hard to express a feeling in words, and especially one that is elicited from the use of a word in a foreign language, but I will try my best to explain this feeling to you.
It makes sense to me to split up this feeling and describe them in different sections. The thing is, the feeling“텐데” has is actually a combination of all of these descriptions, but I feel that different situations elicit a slightly different feeling. Therefore, after reading all of my descriptions below, realize that 텐데 is actually a combination of all of those feelings.
————————————————————————-
For sentences that have “if…” in the past tense, the reason for using 텐데 (vs. not using it) is very subtle. For example, in these two sentences:
날씨가 좋았더라면 저는 공원에 갔을 거예요 = If it was nice out, I would have gone 날씨가 좋았더라면 저는 공원에 갔을 텐데요 = If it was nice out, I would have gone
Their meanings are virtually the same. However, in the sentence with “텐데”, there is a slight nuance/feeling of regret. There is no way I can translate this into words, but it is there. Because of this, you typically only see this type of sentence when you want to express this nuance/feeling. There, a sentence with a similar structure but no feeling of regret should typically would not use 텐데. For example:
뛰다가 조심하지 않았다면 넘어졌을 거예요 = If I wasn’t careful when I was running, I would have fallen
Here, under most situations, it would be strange to write that sentence like this: 뛰다가 조심하지 않았다면 넘어졌을 텐데요
————————————————————————-
For sentences that have “even if…” in the past or present tense, the reason for using 텐데 (vs. not using it) is also very subtle. For example, in these two sentences:
날씨가 좋았더라도 저는 공원에 안 갔을 거예요 = Even if it was nice out, I still wouldn’t have gone 날씨가 좋았더라도 저는 공원에 안 갔을 텐데요 = Even if it was nice out, I still wouldn’t have gone
Their meanings are virtually the same. However, in the sentence with “텐데”, there is a slight nuance/feeling of being annoyed. This is technically the same as the feeling of “regret” in my description above, but it feels closer to an annoying feeling when used with ~더라도. For example:
날씨가 좋았더라도 저는 공원에 안 갔을 텐데요 = Even if it was nice out, I still wouldn’t have gone 제가 돈이 있었더라도 그것을 안 샀을 텐데요 = Even if I had money, I wouldn’t have bought that
Again, it is very hard to translate this specific feeling of “텐데”, but its addition brings the translation closer to something like:
Ugh, even if it was nice out, I still wouldn’t have gone, and Ugh, even if I had money, I wouldn’t have bought that
————————————————————————-
For sentences that have “if” in the present tense, the reason for using 텐데 (vs. not using it) is also very subtle. For example, in these two sentences:
음식이 더 있으면 좋을 거야 = It would be good if there was more food 음식이 더 있으면 좋을 텐데 = It would be good if there was more food
Their meanings are virtually the same. However, in the sentence with “텐데”, there is a slight nuance/feeling of “oh, that’s too bad”. This is technically the same as the feeling of “regret” and “being annoyed” in my descriptions above, but it feels closer to a “that’s too bad” feeling when used with “if” in the present tense like this. Again, it is very hard to translate the specific use of “텐데”, but its addition bring the translation closer to something like:
음식이 더 있으면 좋을 텐데 = Oh, it’s too bad there isn’t more food, because if there were, I would eat it
Here’s another example:
친구가 빨리 왔으면 좋을 텐데 = Ugh, I wish my friend would come quickly/It would be nice if my friend came quickly
Remember what I said at the beginning of these descriptions – the feeling that I’m trying to describe is actually a combination of all of these… all taken on by one word. I’m trying to compartmentalize them, but try to realize that they’re actually all the same feeling. Because of that, any sentence using 텐데 could have any of these feelings, it’s really up to the mood and context of the sentence. For example, in this sentence:
날씨가 좋더라도 나는 갈 수 없어 = Even if the weather is nice, I can’t go 날씨가 좋더라도 나는 갈 수 없을 텐데 = Even if the weather is nice, I can’t go
The purpose of using “텐데” in the second example is to express this nuance/feeling. What is the feeling? Well, it’s a combination of regret (maybe less so), and being annoyed and saying “oh, that’s too bad”. You’ll see this same feeling talked about in the next section, but in that section I talk about it being used as a “worry” feeling.
-ㄹ/을 텐데’ eul tende I am afraid that, I suppose that   It might have been
Formation
Present or Past Verb Stem + ㄹ/을 텐데 [tende] - “it would/could/should/might be or have been”
examples
많다 “to be many/much” 많을 텐데 “there could be many/much”
만날 텐데 “could meet”
Sentences
지금은 여름이라 수영장에 사람들이 많을 텐데… Jigeumeun yeoreum-ira suyeongjange saramdeuli maneultende… “There could be many people in the swimming pool since it is summer…”
거기에 가면 그를 만날 텐데… Geogie gamyeon geureul man-nal tende… “You could meet him if you go there…”
동대문에 가면 다양한 옷들을 볼 텐데… Dongdaemune dayanghan maneun ot-deuleul bol tende… “(We) could see various types of clothing if you go to Dongdaemun…”
작년에 그 수영장에 갔었다면 많은 사람들을 보았었을 텐데… Jang-nyeone geu su-yeongjang-e gasseotdamyeon maneun saramdeureul bo-asseosseul tende… “(You) should have seen many people if you went to that swimming pool last year…”
By placing ~ㄹ/을 텐데 at the end of a sentence, you can indicate that you suppose or expect something to be the case. This is typically done when the speaker is not the acting agent (the subject/topic) in the sentence. For example:
비가 올 텐데 = It will probably rain (I suppose that it will rain) 날씨가 추울 텐데 = The weather will probably be cold 그가 집에 없을 텐데 = He probably won’t be home
difference between those sentences, and the following sentences:”
비가 올 것 같아 = It will probably rain 추울 것 같아 = The weather will probably be cold 그가 집에 없을 것 같아 = He probably won’t be home
When you use ~ㄹ/을 텐데, you are slightly more sure of something happening (sort of like the difference between (“I might,” and “I will probably.)
When you use ~ㄹ/을 텐데, you are indicating a very slight feeling of being worried, annoyed, thinking “too bad” (where appropriate depending on the context). For example, in the sentence:
추울 텐데 = The weather will probably be cold…
You are indicating that the weather will probably be cold – and, as a result of that – you are a little bit worried or irritated (depending on the context).
More examples:
그 식당이 이미 닫았을 텐데 = The restaurant is probably already closed
퇴근시간이라서 길이 막힐 텐데 = The roads will probably be jammed because it is rush hour
Using ~ㄹ/을 텐데 (or ~ㄹ/을 테니까) in the middle of a sentence
you can use this usage of ~ㄹ/을 텐데 to connect two clauses as well. The meaning it takes when used like this is “it is probable that… so.” For example:
그 식당이 이미 닫았을 텐데 가지 말자 = The restaurant will probably already be closed, so let’s not go 길이 막힐 텐데 지하철로 가자 = The roads will probably be jammed, so let’s take the subway 우유가 없을 텐데 하나만 사세요 = We probably don’t have any milk, so buy one
Just by the nature of the first clause, the second clause is usually some sort of a suggestion. However, not always:
부장님이 없었을 텐데 그래도 부장님을 만나러 회사에 갔어요?  = The boss probably wasn’t there, regardless, did you go to work to meet him?
Also notice that these constructions are essentially the same as:
~ㄹ/을 것 같아서
For example:
길이 막힐 텐데 지하철로 가자 = The roads will probably be jammed, so let’s take the subway 길이 막힐 것 같아서 지하철로 가자 = The roads will probably be jammed, so let’s take the subway
Using ~ㄹ/을 테니까 in this way creates a very similar (if not identical) meaning to ~ㄹ/을 텐데:
길이 막힐 테니까 지하철로 가자 = The roads will probably be jammed, so let’s take the subway 그 식당이 이미 닫았을 테니까 가지 말자 = The restaurant will probably already be closed, so let’s not go 우유가 없을 테니까 하나만 사세요 = We probably don’t have any milk, so buy one
Other examples: 학생들이 이 내용을 이해하지 못할 테니까 이 내용까지만 하세요 = The students probably won’t understand this content, so just teach them only up until this point 학생들이 이 내용을 이해하지 못할 텐데 이 내용까지만 하세요 = The students probably won’t understand this content, so just teach them only up until this point
You can also use both of these ~ㄹ/을 텐데 and ~ㄹ/을 테니까 to indicate that you are going to (or intend to) do something – and the second clause reflects that.
Now, you will often see sources indicating that it is acceptable to use either ~ㄹ/을 텐데 or ~ㄹ/을 테니까 to express this usage of “intention.” It is more common and more natural to use ~ㄹ/을 테니까 and not ~ㄹ/을 텐데. Note that this only applies to this one specific meaning of “intention.” Some examples:
지금 갈 테니까 조금 더 기다려 주세요 = I’m going to leave now, so wait just a little bit longer 제가 돈을 많이 벌 테니까 걱정하지 마세요 = I am going to earn a lot of money, so don’t worry
You could also, in theory, end a sentence with this usage. However, you should treat these as incomplete sentences, and they can only really be used when the second clause can be assumed from context. This is similar to ending a sentence with “아/어서.” For example:
걱정 마. 내가 돈을 많이 벌 거라서… = Don’t worry. Because I’m going to earn a lot of money. 걱정 마. 내가 돈을 많이 벌 테니까… = Don’t worry. Because I’m going to earn a lot of money
Notes
The Structure of 텐데 [tende] 텐데 basically comes from 터 + 이 + ㄴ데 → 터인데 [teoinde] → 텐데 [tende] - 터 is 'a dependable noun’ that indicates “a (previous) expectation, presumption, will (intention), and a state (condition)” of a speaker".   - 이 is 'the stem of a word’ - ㄴ데 is 'the ending of a word’ - therefore, 터 + 이 + ㄴ데 becomes 터인데 [teoinde] = 텐데 [tende] “it would/could/should/might be or have been” Second, now let’s take a look at the conjuagation rules
.ttk 9 16
으)ㄹ 테니까 -할테니까-eultenikka, -haltenikka I will do -, so  I suppose
Formation
V/S + ㄹ /을 테니까
vowel  ㄹ 테니까
도와주다 [dowajuda] “to help / to assist” 도와주 + ㄹ 테니까 도와줄 테니까 “I will help, so…”
놀다 [nolda] “to play” 놀 + 테니까 놀 테니까 “I will play, so…”
consonant  을 테니까
넣다 [neo-ta] “to put / 넣 + 을 테니까 넣을 테니까 "I will put, so…”
Sentences
1. It means “will” when the speaker “I” is talking about the speaker’s own action because the speaker “I” is sure of it
내가 도와 줄 테니까 걱정하지 마. [도와주다 “to help” → 도와줄 테니까 “I will help (you), so…” ] Naega dowajul tenikka geokjeonghaji ma. “I will help you, so don’t worry.”
내가 갈 테니까 기달려.  [가다 “to go"→ 갈 테니까 "I will go, so…”] Naega gal tenikka gidalryeo. “I will be there, so wait (for me).”
2. indicates 'probable actions/outcomes’ when the subject is someone (or something) other than “I” It means “probably” because the sentence is talking about other peoples actions; so it’s more of a guess/presumption
조만간 비가 올 테니까 우산 가지고 와야해. [(비가) 오다"to come"→ 올 테니까 “The rain is probably coming, so…”] Jo-man-gan biga ol tenikka u-san gajigo wa-yaha. “It’s probably raining sooner or later, so you should bring an umbrella with you.”
아이가 놀 테니까 자리를 비켜주자. [놀다"to play"→ 놀 테니까 “A boy (baby) is probably playing, so…”] Ai-ga nol tenikka jarireul bikyeojuja. “A baby is probably playing (here), so let’s give him a room to play.”
곧 기름을 다 넣을 테니까 갈 준비를 하자. [넣다 “to put"→ 넣을 테니까 "He/she is probably putting, so…”] Got gireum-eul da neoeul tenikka gal junbireul haja. “The car is probably filled up with gas soon, so be prepared to drive.”
expresses a connection between two actions, one being a reason / background / condition for the other. There are many other ways to say “so” and “therefore,” but you use this structure when you want to say that you will do something or something will take place, so you want the other person to do something accordingly, or you want something else to happen as a result.
The word 터 means “place,” “condition,” “position,” or “status,” so the entire structure literally means “things are in a status where…” or “things are in a way that _____ something, therefore you do ______.” So you can use this structure when you want to express that you are doing or going to do something as a result or in reaction to something else or that you want someone to do something in reaction to something.
Original meaning -테니(까) comes from the combination of 터 and -이니(까). 터 means a “place”, “site”, “lot”, “ground”, or “foundation”. There are mainly two usages for this structure: 1. When you are offering to do something and you ask the listener to do something else in return. What you ask of the other person doesn’t always have to be a favor that you want; it can also be something that you want them to do for their own good. Therefore, -(으)ㄹ 테니(까) is often translated as “I will do this, so in return, I want you to do this”. As a result, you can notuse this structure for all situations where you say “therefore” or “so”. Example 이건 제가 할 테니까, 걱정하지 말고 쉬세요. = I will do this, so don’t worry and get some rest. In the sentence above, you are offering to take care of something and telling the other person to go get some rest. You cannot use the same structure about someone else doing the same thing. For example, “이건 석진 씨가 할 테니까, 걱정하지 말고 쉬세요” is not a natural sentence.
If you want to say something like “Seokjin will take care of this, so don’t worry” in Korean either just use the -을 거니까 ending and say “진 씨가 할 거니까”, or you can keep yourself as the subject of the sentence by saying “이건 석진 씨한테 하라고 할 테니까”, meaning “I will ask Seokjin to do this, so…”.
2. When you are making an assumption and are almost certain about something, you can use this structure to mean “I assume/think/believe that this will happen/is happening, so let’s do this/please do this.” Even when you are talking about a present state or action, since you’re assuming and WILL have to check to see if you’re right, it’s always in the future tense. Example 밖에 추울 테니까 나가지 마세요. = It must be cold outside, so don’t go out. If you are NOT making an assumption and just saying a plainly known fact, you can use the -( 으)니까 structure and just say “밖에 추우니까”. The -(으)ㄹ 테니(까) structure is often used together with -(으)면, which means “if”. For example, if you say “지금 밖에 나가면 추울 테니까”, it means “if you go outside now, it will be cold, so…” Sample Sentences 1. 제가 점심 살 테니까, 경화 씨가 커피 사세요. = I will buy lunch, so Kyung-hwa, you buy the coffee. 2. 저는 먼저 갈 테니까, 나중에 오세요. = I will go first, so you come late
나머지는 제가 할 테니까, 먼저 퇴근하세요. = I’ll do the rest, so please go home first. 4. 저는 뛰어갈 테니까, 효진 씨는 택시 타고 오세요. = I’ll run, so Hyojin, you take a taxi. 5. 갑자기 찾아가면 놀랄 테니까, 전화를 할까요? = If we visit her suddenly, she’ll be surprised, so shall we call her
~(으)ㄴ/는 모양이다-neun (eu)n/eul moyang ida  It appears that
Formation
Noun
(present) 인 모양이다 (past)였단/이였단 모양이다
Descriptive Verb Tenses
(present)~(으)ㄴ 모양이다 past)~았/었단 모양이다 ( (future)~(으)ㄹ 모양이다
Action Verb Tenses
~는 모양이다 (present) ~(으)ㄴ 모양이다 (past) ~(으)ㄹ 모양이다 (future)
지금 학생들이 바이올린을 연습 하는 모양이야. I guess the students are practicing violin now.
방에 영화 DVD가 있는 걸 보니까 밤늦게까지 영화를 본 모양이에요. Seeing that there are some DVDs in his room, I guess he watched movies until late at night.
이 컴퓨터가 느린 모양이야. I guess this computer is slow
Sometimes ~(으)ㄴ/는 걸 보니까 is used earlier in  sentences with ~(으)ㄴ/는 모양이다 in order to express the basis upon which the guess or inference is made.   모양 literally means “shape” or ���appearance.“ ~(으)ㄴ/는 모양이다 cannot describe something the speaker did herself or himself.   Nor can it be used when the basis for the guess or inference is not a fact.   So, it cannot be used for subjective feelings or beliefs.   Instead, ~(으)ㄹ 것 같다 is usually more appropriate in those contexts.
-neun (eu)n/eul jul arda/ moreudada   I think, I know
Formation (present tense)Verb stem + -는 줄 알다 (past tense)Verb stem + -ㄴ 줄 알다 (future tenseVerb stem + -ㄹ/을 줄 알다 )
-neun (eu)n/eul jul arassda/ morrassda   I thought, I knew
줄 알았다 I thought that But we can also use this structure to mean "to have known something,” so the meaning changes depending on the intonation of the sentence in which we use this structure.
For example, we can translate 집에 있는 줄 알다 in two different ways. When the emphasis is on 알다 (“to know”), the sentence means “to know that he/she is at home,” and when the emphasis is on 집에 있는 (“to be at home”), the sentence means “to wrongly think that he/she is at home.” So it is important to pay attention to the intonation of the sentence when you use this structure.
Sentences
아무도 안 올 줄 알았어요. amudo an ol jul arasseoyo. “I thought nobody would come.”
오늘이 일요일인 줄 알았어요. oneul-i iryoil-in jul arasseoyo. “I thought it was Sunday today.”
저만 늦은 줄 알았어요. jeo-man neujeun jul arasseoyo. “I thought I was the only one who was late.”
그렇게 하면 안 되는 줄 알았어요. geureoke hamyeon an doeneun jul arasseoyo. “I thought I wasn’t supposed to do that.”
시험이 어려울 줄 알았어요. siheom-i eoryeo-ul jul arasseoyo. “I thought the exam would be difficult.”
Notes We can replace 알다with 모르다 (“to not know”) to mean “do not know that…” For Example: 1. 시험이 어려울 줄 알았어요. “I thought the exam would be difficult.” 2. 시험이 어려울 줄 몰랐어요. “I didn’t know the exam would be difficult.” 3. 시험이 어려울 줄 알았어요. (with emphasis on 알았어요) “I knew the exam would be difficult.” 시험이 어려울 거라고 생각 안 했어요. “I didn’t think the exam would be difficult
..neunji moreugessda   htsk 30Not sure
저는 친구가 어디 가는지 몰라요 = I don’t know where my friend is going
It is also worth pointing out here that the future tense ~겠다 is commonly added to 모르다 in these types of sentences. When 모르다 is used like this (as “모르겠다”), it does not have a future tense meaning. Rather, it is just a common (and slightly more polite) way to say that one “does not know something.” Therefore, it would be more common to see the sentence above written/spoken as:
저는 친구가 어디 가는지 모르겠어요 = I don’t know where my friend is going
-나 보다 [-na bo-da]= I assume, I suppose, I guess
Descriptive Verbs present-(으)ㄴ가 보다 [-(eu)n-ga bo-da] past 았/었/였나 봐요
Action verbs [present tense] Verb stem + -나 보다 [-na bo-da] [past tense] Verb stem + -았/었/였 + -나 보다 [-at/eot/yeot + -na bo-da]
-나 보다 is only used with action verbs. For descriptive verbs, you need to use a different structure, which we will introduce in the next lesson
This is usually only used when you are talking about people other than yourself. But when you talk about yourself using this -나 보다 structure, you are referring to yourself as a third person, making assumptions about why or how you have done something. Ex) I guess you don’t like coffee. Ex) I guess I never heard about it.
Conjugation  
하다 = to do 하 + -나 보다 = 하나 보다 [ha-na bo-da] = I guess they do + something → [present tense] 하나 봐요. → [past tense] 했나 봐요 (For future tense, you need to use a different structure,.)
Examples: 모르다 [mo-reu-da] = to not know 모르나 봐요. [mo-reu-na bwa-yo.] = I guess he(she/they) don’t know. [past tense] 몰랐나 봐요. [mol-lat-na bwa-yo.] = I guess he(she/they) didn’t know.
없다 [eop-da] = to be not there, to not exist 없나 봐요. [eop-na bwa-yo.] = I guess he(she/they/it) is not there. [past tense] 없었나 봐요. [eop-seot-na bwa-yo.] = I guess he(she/they/it) wasn’t there.
재미있다 [jae-mi-it-da] = to be fun, to be interesting 재미있나 봐요. [jae-mi-it-na bwa-yo.] = I guess it’s fun. / I suppose it’s interesting. [past tense] 재미있었나 봐요. [jae-mi-i-sseot-na bwa-yo.] = I guess it was fun.
사다 [sa-da] = to buy 사나 봐요. [sa-na bwa-yo.] [past tense] 샀나 봐요. [sat-na bwa-yo.] = I guess he(she/they) bought.
sentences: 효진 씨는 아직 모르나 봐요. [hyo-jin ssi-neun a-jik mo-reu-na bwa-yo.] = I guess Hyojin still doesn’t know.
아무도 없나 봐요. [a-mu-do eop-na bwa-yo.] = I guess there’s no one there.
고장났나 봐요. [go-jang-nat-na bwa-yo.] = I guess it broke
descriptive verbs-(으)ㄴ가 보다 [-(eu)n-ga bo-da]
예쁘다 → 예쁜가 보다 (I guess it’s pretty …) 비싸다 → 비싼가 보다 (I guess it’s expensive …) 작다 → 작은가 보다 (I guess it’s small …)
For -이다 [-i-da] (= to be): -이다 changes to -인가 보다
* Note that -이다 is not a descriptive verb on its own but it is usually combined with nouns to make a descriptive statement, so it is followed by -ㄴ가 보다.
Commonly accepted exceptions and irregularities Even though the rule is that action verbs are followed by -나 보다 and descriptive verbs are followed by -(으)ㄴ가 보다, Korean people often use -나 보다 for descriptive verbs too, when the verb stem ends with a last consonant. You can’t use -(으)ㄴ가 보다 for action verbs, but you will often hear Korean people using -나 보다 with descriptive verbs.
Ex) 작다 [jak-da] = to be small Originally, 작 has to be followed by -(으)ㄴ가 보다 because it is a descriptive verb. 작은가 보다 [ja-geun-ga bo-da] = I guess it’s small. But people often say 작나 보다 [jak-na bo-da] to mean the same thing
Exceptions When the descriptive verb is composed of a noun and the verb 있다 [it-da] or 없다 [eop-da], i.e. 재미있다, 맛있다, 재미없다 or 맛없다, you need to add -나 봐요 after 있 or 없. 재미있다 → 재미있나 봐요 / 재미있었나 봐요
sentences
학생이 많아요. [hak-saeng-i ma-na-yo.] = There are a lot of students. → 학생이 많은가 봐요. [hak-saeng-i ma-neun-ga bwa-yo.] = I guess there are a lot of students. → 학생이 많았나 봐요. [hak-saeng-i ma-nat-na bwa-yo.] = I guess there were a lot of students. 요즘 바빠요. [yo-jeum ba-ppa-yo.] = He’s busy these days. → 요즘 바쁜가 봐요. [yo-jeum ba-ppeun-ga bwa-yo.] = I guess he’s busy these days. → 바빴나 봐요. [ba-ppat-na bwa-yo.] = I guess he was busy.
그래요. [geu-rae-yo.] = It is so. That’s right. → 그런가 봐요. [geu-reon-ga bwa-yo.] = I guess so.
이쪽이 더 빨라요. [i-jjo-gi deo ppal-la-yo.] = This way is faster. → 이쪽이 더 빠른가 봐요. [i-jjo-gi deo ppa-reun-ga bwa-yo.] = I guess this way is faster
-(으)려나 보다  i guess it will…For future
Construction:
Action Verbs: -(으)려나 보다
expressing your assumption about a future action that you “assume” someone is going to take or something that you “assume” will happen. For a similar meaning, you can use -(으)ㄹ 것 같다, but -(으)ㄹ 것 같다 generally has a stronger meaning than -(으)려나 보다, and you sound more certain of your statement when you use -(으)ㄹ 것 같다.  
Examples: 닫다 [dat-da] = to close 닫 + -으려나 보다 = 닫으려나 보다 → 닫으려나 봐요. [da-deu-ryeo-na bwa-yo.] = I guess they are going to close it. / It looks like they want to close it.
* 닫을 것 같아요. [da-deul geot ga-ta-yo.] = I think they will close it.
걸어가다 [geo-reo-ga-da] = to walk somewhere 걸어가 + -려나 보다 = 걸어가려나 보다 → 걸어가려나 봐요. [geo-reo-ga-ryeo-na bwa-yo.] = It looks like he is going to walk there.
* 걸어갈 것 같아요. [geo-reo gal geot ga-ta-yo.] = I think he will walk there.
** Note that you cannot use -(으)려나 보다 for descriptive verbs, since you can’t have an intention for “being” in a state. You can talk about “becoming + adjective” or about your effort for getting in a certain state, but not for generally describing a state that you ARE definitely in.
sentences
카페 문을 닫으려나 봐요. [ka-pe mu-neul da-deu-ryeo-na bwa-yo.] [Original verb: 닫다 = to close] = It looks like they are going to close the cafe. 지금 시작하려나 봐요. [ ji-geum si-ja-ka-ryeo-na bwa-yo.] [Original verb: 시작하다 = to start] = It looks like they are going to start now.
-게 되어 있다 (-ge doe-eo itda). This structure literally means that something is "built to be in a certain way”
알다 (alda) “to know” 알 + 게 되어 있다 = 알게 되어 있다 (alge doe-eo itda) “to be bound to know”
때가 되면 알게 되어 있어요. ttae-ga doemyeon alge doe-eo isseoyo. “You will naturally get to know it when time comes.”
열심히 하는 사람은 성공하게 되어 있어요. yeolsimhi haneun saram-eun seonggong-hage doe-eo isseoyo. “Those who work hard are bound to be successful.”
아이들은 저절로 크게 되어 있어요. aideul-eun jeojeollo keuge doe-eo isseoyo. “Children are bound to grow well on their own. (So don’t worry too much about them.)”
-고 들었다-go deureotda I heard that-.
The main verb is 듣다 (deutda), which means “to listen” or “to hear.” … 고 (…go) is a verb ending that works like quotation marks. We usually use the verb 들었다 (deureotda) in the past tense to mean “I heard,” and together, …고 들었다 (go deureotda) means “I heard that…”
Formation ( what you heard) + 고 들었다.
“이 책이 재미있다.”  i chaeki naemiitda - “This book is interesting.”
이 책이 재미있다 + 고 들었다   -> 이 책이 재미있다고 들었다. i chaeki naemiitdago deureotda
I heard that this book is interesting.
“그는 한국에 갔다.”  geuneun hangeuke gatda - “He went to Korea.”
그는 한국에 갔다 + 고 들었다 -> 그는 한국에 갔다고 들었다. geuneun hangeuke gatdago deureotda
I heard that he went to Korea.
Note: When quoting a phrase, we use -(ㄴ)다고 ((n)dago) for almost all verbs, but the verb 이다 (ida), which means “to be,” takes the form of -(이)라고 ((i)rago). Since the future tense -ㄹ/을 것이다 (l/eul geos-ida) ends in 이다 (ida), the sentence ends in -(이)라고 들었다 ((i)rago deureotda).
Sentences
Past tense:
서울에도 눈 왔다고 들었어. seoul-e-do nun watdago deureosseo. “I heard that it was snowing in Seoul, too.”
Future tense:
서울에도 눈 올 거라고 들었어. seoul-e-do nun ol geo-rago deureosseo. “I heard that it would snow in Seoul, too.”
-는 줄 알다, -는 줄 모르다-neun jul alda, -neun jul moreuda didn’t know that, I thought
The ending verb is usually 알다 (alda - to know) or 모르다 (moreuda - do not know) and it follows -ㄴ/은/는 줄 (n/eun/neun jul). So the entire structure means “to know/not know that …” or “to think/not expect that …”
Formation Verb stem + ㄴ/은/는 줄 알다/모르다 (n/eun/neun jul alda/moreuda)
Present Tense, use -ㄴ/는 줄 알다/모르다 Past Tense, use -ㄴ/은 줄 알다/모르다.
present)
저를 기다리는 줄 몰랐어요. (jeo-reul gidarineun jul mollasseoyo) “I didn’t know you were waiting for me.”
past 저를 기다린 줄 몰랐어요. (jeo-reul gidarin jul mollasseoyo) “I didn’t know you had waited for me.”
Sentences
내일이 일요일인 줄 몰랐어요. naeil-i ilyoil-in jul mollasseoyo. “I didn’t know it was Sunday tomorrow.”
어제가 일요일인 줄 몰랐어요. eoje-ga ilyoil-in jul mollasseoyo. “I didn’t know it was Sunday yesterday.”
어제가 일요일인 줄 알았어요. eoje-ga ilyoil-in jul arasseoyo. “I thought it was Sunday yesterday.”
두 사람이 같이 가는 줄 몰랐어요. du saram-i gachi ganeun jul mollasseoyo. “I didn’t know the two of them were going together.”
두 사람이 같이 가는 줄 알았어요. du saram-i gachi ganeun jul arasseoyo. “I thought the two of them were going together.”
두 사람이 같이 간 줄 몰랐어요. du saram-i gachi gan jul mollasseyo. “I thought the two of them had gone together.”
Notes When using -ㄴ/은 줄 알다 in the past tense, it is mostly translated as “I thought it had been …” or “I thought it was…” and when you wanted to say “I knew it was…” or “I knew it had been” more clearly, you can say -ㄴ/은 줄 알고 있다, although it can still mean either one depending on the intonation of the speaker. Ex) 내 생일인 줄 알았어? (nae saeng-il-in jul arasseo?) “Did you think it was my birthday?” Ex) 내 생일인 줄 알고 있었어? (nae saeng-il-in jul algo isseosseo?) “Did you know that it was my birthday?”
-야 할지 모르다-ya halji moreuda don’t know whether or not should do something
Formation
Noun(을/를) + 할지 모르다 [halji moreuda] “not know whether (subject) would do (noun)” Verb Stem + (어/아/여)야 할지 모르다
돌아가다 [dolagada]“to return / to go back” 돌아가 + 야 할지 모르다 돌아가야 할지 모르다 “do not know whether or not I should return (go back)”
하다 [hada]“to do” 하 + ���야 할지 모르다 해야(하어야) 할지 모르다 “do not know whether or not I should do it”
Sentences
차가 막혀서 다시 돌아가야 할지 모르겠네… Chaga makhyeoseo dasi dolagaya halji moreugetne… “Because of heavy traffic, I do not know whether or not (we should) go back the way we came…”
이 드라마를 봐야 할지 안 봐야 할지 모르겠네… I deuramareul bwaya halji an bwaya halji moreugetne… “I am not sure whether or not I should watch this T.V. show…”
이것을 해야 할지 안 해야 할지 모르겠네… 아버지께 물어볼까? Igeoseul haeya halji an haeya halji moreugetne… abeojikke muleobokka? “I do not know whether or not I should do this…Should I ask my dad about this”
Notes Noun(을/를) + 할지 모르다 [halji moreuda] “not know whether (subject) would do (noun)”
허락 [heorak] “permission” 허락(을) + 할지 모르다 허락을 할지 모르다 “not know whether or not (subject) will give me permission”
수업 [su-eop] “a lesson / class” 수업(을) + 할지 모르다 수업을 할지 모르다 “not sure whether or not (subject) will start a lesson”
판매 [panmae] “sales” 판매(를) + 할지 모르다 판매를 할지 모르다 “not know whether or not (subject) will go on sale”
-(으/느)ㄴ지 잘 모르겠어요- I’m not sure if …
Present Tense = -(으/느)ㄴ지 잘 모르겠어요. Past Tense = -았/었/였는지 잘 모르겠어요. Future Tense = -(으)ㄹ지 잘 모르겠어요. = -(으)ㄹ 건지 잘 모르겠어요.
The word for “to be sure” or “to be certain” in Korean is 확실하다 [hwak-si-ra-da]. Therefore, the literal translation of “to not be sure” is 확실하지 않다 [hwak-si-ra-ji an-ta], but this form is not commonly used in everyday spoken Korean.
Are you sure?” When asking someone if they are sure or certain of something, you can still use the word 확실 하다 and say “확실해요?” [hwak-si-rae-yo?]. Or, sometimes you can say “정말이에요?” [jeongma-ri-e-yo?] “Are you serious?” or “Is that real?”.
“I’m not sure” The most natural Korean expression for “I’m not sure” is “잘 모르겠어요” [jal mo-reu-ge-sseoyo]. The word 모르다 means “to not know” 잘 몰라요” it means “I don’t know well.” or “I don’t know much (about it).” The suffix -겠- adds the nuance of assumption or intention (-겠- .), so 모르겠어요, you mean “I don’t seem to know” or “I would like to know, but I really don’t.” 잘 모르겠어요 means the same thing as 모르겠어요 because you don’t actually need the word “잘” there, but “잘 모르겠어요” is a common and fixed expression used by many Korean people to mean “I’m not sure” or “I don’t know for sure.
You can use interrogative words (when/what/where/how/who/why/which) with this structure, too.
Present Tense = -(으/느)ㄴ지 잘 모르겠어요.
이거 누구 책인지 잘 모르겠어요. [i-geo nu-gu chae-gin-ji jal mo-reu-ge-sseo-yo.] = I’m not sure whose book this is.
Past Tense = -았/었/였는지 잘 모르겠어요.
다 끝났는지 잘 모르겠어요. [da kkeut-nat-neun-ji jal mo-reu-ge-sseo-yo.] = I’m not sure if it all ended
Future Tense = -(으)ㄹ지 잘 모르겠어요. = -(으)ㄹ 건지 잘 모르겠어요.
서점이 내일 문을 열지 잘 모르겠어요. [seo-jeo-mi nae-il mu-neul yeol-ji jal mo-reu-ge-sseo-yo.] = I’m not sure if the bookstore will open tomorrow. if you want to add “or not” at the end, you can use the structure Verb stem + -(으/느)ㄴ지 + Verb stem + 안 -(으/는)ㄴ지.
어디로 갈지 잘 모르겠어요. [eo-di-ro gal-ji jal mo-reu-ge-sseo-yo.] = I’m not sure where we will go.
내일 만날지 안 만날지 잘 모르겠어요. [nae-il man-nal-ji an man-nal-ji jal mo-reu-ge-sseo-yo.] = I’m not sure if we will meet tomorrow or not.
[mwol hae-ya doel-ji jal mo-reu-ge-sseo-yo.] = I am not sure what to do. = I am not sure what I (will) have to do.
이게 무슨 뜻인지 잘 모르겠어요. [i-ge mu-seun tteu-sin-ji jal mo-reu-ge-sseo-yo.] = I’m not sure what this means.
-겠다 (-gaetda) Must be
Formation Verb Stem + 겠다
It must be used in the declarative, and solely with descriptive verbs. This grammatical structure is regarded as in the intimate politeness level.
As this structure indicates the speakers supposition, it is never used to make a supposition of oneself.
This structure can be translated as “must be,” “is probably,” “I guess.”
Verb Stem + 겠다
Example: hada hagessda
힘들겠다.
Sentences
와! 그 케이크 맛있겠다! (wa! geu keikeu masitgetda!) - Wow, that cake must be delicious! (I bet that cake is delicious!)
Related Expressions Future Indicat
2 notes · View notes
korean-layout · 7 years ago
Text
Form
n
shape form
shape figur
round
oval
square
rectangular
dreieck
straight
line
curve
circle
pentagon
hexagon
octagon
point
diagonal
horizontal
vertical
cylinder
pyramid
cube
ellipse
0 notes
korean-layout · 7 years ago
Text
Time c
n
over the course of time
일찍 = early
바로 -즉시= immediately
직접 = directly
갑자기 - 문득 = suddenly= 
점점 - 점차- 서서히= gradually
단계적으로 = step by step/phased in
한꺼번에 = all at once
결국 = eventually
드디어-마침내 -최종적으로= finally, at last
reihenfolge
미리 = in advance/beforehand
우선 = to do something first
맨 = at the very begging, end, start, finish
직전 = just before
직후 = right after
번갈아 = one at a time, taking turns
fr
맨날 [maen-nal] = (lit. everyday,) always, all the time [more common in spoken language] 매일 = everyday 매년 = every year
항상 - 늘- eonjena- always
정기적으로 = regularly
계속 - 끊임없이 -줄곧= continuously/constantly/all the time
보통 / 대개 , 평소에 - 일반적으로 pyeongsoe- usually
정기적으로 = regularly
자주 jaju/  -종종 = often
수시로 = frequently
가끔 gaggeum / 때로는 - sometimes
때때로 / 종종 - occasionally
별로 [byeol-lo], 드물게 - rarely
거의 [geo-ui] = almost not at all
전혀 [jeon-hyeo] = not at all 절대jeoldae - never
다시 dasi, ddo 또again 자꾸 repeaetedly
이미 [i-mi] .벌써 [beol-sseo] – already
아직 [a-jik]– still, not yet
역시,,역시나 still after all, knew it
미침 = just in time
와중 = meanwhile
동시에 = same time
더 이상 - anymore
이제부터 ijebuteo from now on
영원히 forever
영영 = forever/for good (usually leaving
이미 [i-mi] .벌써 [beol-sseo] – already
When you and/or the speaker know about something already and talk about it, you use 이미. When you are just finding out about it as you speak you use 벌써. 벌써 왔어요? [beol-sseo wa-sseo-yo?] Oh, you are already here!
아직 [a-jik]– still, not yet
- means “still,” or “yet” when used with positives; -means “not yet” when used with negatives. -도 (-do) can be added to add emphasis.
아직 안 했어요. [a-jik an hae-sseo-yo.] .I haven’t done it yet. 아직도 몰라요?    [a-jik-do mol-la-yo?] You still don’t know?
역시,,역시나" has a veriety of meanings. "also" or "too",,"still",, "after all" but we often use "역시" in a sentence such as, "(역시) 그럴줄 알았어", which means "I knew it" "(역시) 네가 해낼줄 알았어", which means " I knew it you could make it."
더 이상 - anymore
낮 = daytime
밤 = night
어젯밤 = last night
요일 = day of week 밤새 = overnight 세기 = century 새해 = new years 년대 = (2010년대) = year
재작년 = two years ago, the year before last
금년 = this year, the present year
보름 = fifteen days/half a month
현재로는 = as of now 지금으로(서)는 = as of now
그때- then
그때- then
전에 jeone before, ago
오래 전 = a long time before
예전에 ye jeone – in the old days
요즘 yojeum -요새 -오늘날 =  these days
최근에- recently
아까 [agga]  – a while ago today
jogeum jeone – a little before
방금 = a moment ago
직전 = just before
지금jigeum -이제  now
곧- soon
금방geumbang
a geumbang future  will..soon
geumbang olgeyo I will come soon
geumbang munja halgeyo I will text you soon
b geumbang past   did just now
geumbang oasseoyo I came just now
iddaga – in a while
나중에najunge, 후에– later
throughout a time
최초 = the first time in history something is done or occurs
초 = beginning of a time period
말 = end of a time period
이래 = since
그 후로 = since then
동안 = for, during, while
한동안 = for a while, for some time
오랫동안 = for a long time
잠깐 = a short time
한참 = a long time
내내 = throughout a time
그 동안 = during that time/meanwhile
정시= a set time
당분간 = for the time being
지금껏 = until now
당장 = right now, for the time being
잠시 = a moment
하루 종일 = all day long
온종일 = all day
생전 = in one’s whole life
평생 (동안) =  throughout my whole life
평생 동반자 = lifelong companion
Example: 저는 평생 동안 하키를 했어요 = I played hockey my whole lif
그저께 = the day before yesterday
미래 = future
앞으로 = future
현재 = now/present
시절 = the good “days”, my school “days”
jogeum jeone oasseoyo - I came a little before
지금 어디예요? (Jigeum eodi-yeyo?) “Where are you now?” 지금 몇 시예요? (Jigeum myeot si-yeyo?) “What time is it now?” 지금 있어요? (Jigeum isseoyo?) “Do you have it now?” 지금 없어요. (Jigeum eopseoyo.) “I don’t have it now.” 지금 바빠요. (Jigeum bappayo.) “I’m busy at the moment. 지금 청소 해. (Jigeum cheongso hae.) "I’m cleaning now.”
iddaga hal geyi ill do it in a while najunge hal geyo ill do it later
1. 가끔 서점에 가요. [ga-kkeum seo-jeo-me ga-yo.] = I go to the bookstore sometimes. = 서점에 가끔 가요. 2. 한국 영화 자주 봐요. [han-guk yeong-hwa ja-ju bwa-yo.] = I watch Korean movies often. = 자주 한국 영화 봐요.
3. 항상 물어보고 싶었어요. [hang-sang mu-reo-bo-go si-peo-sseo-yo.] = I’ve always wanted to ask you. 4. 중국어를 맨날 공부하는데, 아직 어려워요. [ jung-gu-geo-reul maen-nal gong-bu-ha-neun-de, a-jik eo-ryeo-wo-yo.] = I study Chinese all the time, but it’s still difficult. 5. 요즘에는 운동을 별로 안 해요. [yo-jeu-me-neun un-dong-eul byeol-lo an hae-yo.] = I rarely work out these days. = These days, I seldom work out. = These days, I don’t work out that often. 6. 시간이 없어서, 친구들을 거의 못 만나요. [si-ga-ni eop-seo-seo, chin-gu-deu-reul geo-ui mot man-na-yo.] = I don’t have time, so I can hardly meet my friends
한국 영화 자주 봐요. [han-guk yeong-hwa ja-ju bwa-yo.] == 자주 한국 영화 봐요. I watch Korean movies often.
맨날 [maen-nal] = (lit. everyday,) always, all the time [more common in spoken language] 중국어를 맨날 공부하는데, 아직 어려워요. [ jung-gu-geo-reul maen-nal gong-bu-ha-neun-de, a-jik eo-ryeo-wo-yo.] = I study Chinese all the time, but it’s still difficult.
2 notes · View notes
korean-layout · 7 years ago
Text
Reported Speech I
n
general -고(1) -go  said, to say that
-고 (-go) is used in reported speech and acts as quotation marks. The statement of question that is being reported comes before -고 (-go). What follows after that is typically a speaking or listening verb.
Examples:
(1)-고 말하다 - "said..." (2)-고 하다 - "said..."  short for malhada (3)-고 말씀하시다 - "said..." (honorific) (4)-고 듣다 - "heard..." (5)-고 묻다 - "asked"
The listening/speaking verb inflects the tense, mood, negation or politeness leve Direct Quotes
~라고/이라고 + speaking verb
제가 하고 싶지 않습니다 그는 “제가 하고 싶지 않습니다” 라고 했어요
그는 너를 사랑한다고 했어 = He said I love you 그는 “너를 사랑해”라고 했어 = He said “I love you”
indirect quotes
quoting -Neun/(eu)n  Eu)l ji Indirect question form
l.Reporting a Statement:
:declarative form + 고 +(Speaking/Listening Verb)
Quoting with 이다: Present~(이)라고 Past 이었다고
Verb Future l geo yeyo
Action Verbs    Declarative Past Tense Present Tense Future Tense 하다 (to do) 했다 한다 하겠다 가다 (to go) 갔다 간다 가겠다 먹다 (to eat) 먹었다 먹는다 먹겠다
Descriptive Verbs Declarative Adjective  Past tense Present tense Future tense 행복하다  행복했다 행복하다 행복하겠다 비싸다     비쌌다 비싸다            비싸겠다 길다     길었다 길다            길겠다 맛있다     맛있었다 맛있다            맛있겠다 낡다     낡았다 낡다            낡겠다
Examples Action Verbs
Statement:학교 안 갔어요. (I didn't go to school) Verb in declarative form:안 갔다 + 고 말하다. 학교 안 갔다고 말했어요. (He) said (he) didn't go to school
나는 그가 너를 좋아한다고 말했어 = I said that he likes you 나는 그가 너를 좋아했다고 말했어 = I said that he liked you 나는 그가 너를 좋아하겠다고 말했어 = I said that he will like you 나는 그가 너를 좋아한다고 말하고 있어 = I am saying (telling you) that he likes you 나는 그가 너를 좋아한다고 말할 거야 = I will say that he likes you
If you want to indicate to whom this quote is said to, you can attach ~에게/한테/께 to the person being spoken to:
나는 엄마에게 그가 너를 좋아한다고 말할 거야 = I will tell mom that he likes you
선생님은 학생들이 늦게 도착했다고 말했다 = The teacher said that the students arrived late 선생님은 학생들이 늦게 도착한다고 말했다 = The teacher said that the students arrive late 선생님은 학생들이 늦게 도착하겠다고 말했다 = The teacher said that the students will arrive late
나는 너에게 같이 가야 한다고 했어 = I said (to you) that we have to go together 출력이 아직 안 된다고 말했어요 = I said that the output still doesn’t work 나는 아빠에게 집에 안 가겠다고 말할 거야 = I’m going to tell my dad that I won’t go home 나는 선생님에게 열심히 공부했다고 말했어 = I told the teacher that I studied hard 저는 오늘 1시 정각에 도착하겠다고 말했어요 = I said that I would arrive at 1:00 on the hour 이 길에 큰 자동차가 운전하면 안 된다고 말했어요 = I said that big vehicles are not allowed to drive on this road 저는 그 밧줄의 길이를 늘여야 된다고 이미 말했어요 = I already said that we need to make the length of that rope longer 현금인출기에서 현금을 뽑으러 은행에 가야 된다고 말할 거예요 = I’m going to say that I need to go to the bank to take out cash from the ATM 그는 공부하지 않았다고 했어요 = He said that he didn’t study 민수는 지금 공부한다고 했어. (Minsu said he\'s studying now.) 엄마가 부산에서는 어제 비가 왔다고 했어. (My mother said it rained yesterday in Busan 1. 오늘부터 백화점 세일 한다고 했어요. oneul-buteo baekhwajeom seil handago haesseoyo. I heard that the department was having a sale starting today.
2. 민수는 내일 도착한다고 했어요. minsu-neun naeil dochakhandago haesseoyo. Minsu said that he would arrive tomorrow.
3. 지수가 도와준다고 했어. jisu-ga dowajundago haesseo. Jisu said that she would help me.
4. 여기에 오면 찾을 수 있다고 했어. yeogi-e omyeon chajeul su itdago haesseo. He said that I would find it if I come here.
5. 민경이가 자기가 한다고 했어. mingyeong-i-ga jagi-ga handago haesseo. Mingyeong said that she would do it herself. Examples Descriptive Verbs 6. 오늘 춥다고 했어요. oneul chupdago haesseoyo. "They said it would be cold today."/"I heard it would be cold today." 7. 이게 더 좋다고 했어요. ige deo jotago haesseoyo. "They said that this was better."/"I heard that this was better." 우리 엄마는 내가 예쁘다고 말했어. (My mother said that I am pretty.) 밧줄의 길이가 너무 부족하다고 했어요= I said that the length of this rope is not enough (insufficient) 우리 아빠는 자기가 어렸을 때 너무 행복했다고 했어요= My dad said that he was very happy when he was young 대부분 사람들이 이 영화의 주인공이 아주 잘생겼다고 말해요= Most people say that the main character of this move is very handsome 서울 사람들은 서울시 고등학교 교육과정이 불만족스럽다고 말해요 = The people of Seoul say that they are not satisfied with the Seoul high school curriculum
Also remember that있다 and 없다 are adjectives when they are used to indicate that one has, or does not have an object. This means that 있다 and 없다 should be quoted like other adjectives (also remember that ~ㄹ/을 수 있다/없다 falls in this category as well). For example:Also remember that 싶다 is an adjective as well.
저는 학교에 갈 수 없다고 했어요 = I said I can’t go to school 학생이 이해할 수 없다고 했어요 = The student said he can’t understand 그는 다음 주 목요일에 여행할 수 있다고 했어요 = He said that he will be able to travel next Thursday 저는 현금이 없다고 해서 현금인출기에 갔어요 = I said that I don’t have cash, so we went to the ATM 저는 여자 친구에게 같이 가고 싶은 데가 있다고 말했어요 = I told my girlfriend that there is a place that I want to go with her (together) 제가 계속 아무 것도 필요가 없다고 했지만 엄마가 선물을 사 줬어요 = I kept saying that I don’t need anything, but my mom bought me a present 저는 모든 나라가 민주주��� 국가로 변하는 것을 상상할 수 없다고 말했어요 = I said that I can’t imagine all countries changing to democratic nations 나는 새로운 차를 사고 싶다고 했어 = I said that I want to buy a new car 이 장소에서 나무를 심고 싶다고 말했어요 = I said that I want to plant a tree in this location
ida
prsent 그가 의사라고 했어요 = He said he is a doctor 우리 선생님은 제가 나쁜 학생이라고 했어요 = Our teacher said I am a bad student 저는 우리 가족에게 이 사람이 저의 여자 친구라고 했어요 = I told my family that this person is my girlfriend 나는 너에게 그것이 해야 하는 일이라고 벌써 말했어 = I already told you that that is something you have to do 이거라고 말하다 [i-geo-ra-go ma-ra-da] = to say that it is this, to say that this is it 학생이라고 말하다 [hak-saeng-i-ra-go ma-ra-da] = to say that he/she is a student “감사합니다”라고 말하다 [gam-sa-ham-ni-da-ra-go ma-ra-da] = to say “감사합니다”
All these expressions above can be respectively substituted with: - 이거라고 하다 - 학생이라고 하다 - “감사합니다”라고 하다
이거라고 했어요. [i-geo-ra-go hae-sseo-yo.] = He/She/They said that it was this. 한국 사람이라고 했어요. [han-guk sa-ra-mi-ra-go hae-sseo-yo.] = He/She/They said that he/she/they was a Korean person. 뭐라고 말했어요? [mwo-ra-go ma-rae-sseo-yo?] = What did you say? = What did you tell them? = 뭐라고 했어요? 제가 일등이라고 들었어요. [ je-ga il-deung-i-ra-go deu-reo-sseo-yo.] = I heard that I was the first place winner. 여기가 TTMIK 사무실이라고 해요. [yeo-gi-ga TTMIK sa-mu-si-ri-ra-go hae-sseo-yo.] = They say that this is the TalkToMeInKorean office. 저는 “(person’s name)”(이)라고 해요. = [jeo-neun (person’s name)-i-ra-go hae-yo.] = My name is (person’s name).
Sample Sentences (of both -(이)라고 and -(ㄴ/는)다고) 1. 뭐라고 했어요? [mwo-ra-go hae-sseo-yo?] = What did you say? 2. 전화 온다고 했어요. [ jeon-hwa on-da-go hae-sseo-yo.] = I said that your phone is ringing. 3. 그 사람이 내일 온다고 해요. [geu sa-ra-mi nae-il on-da-go hae-yo.] = He says that he will come tomorrow.
6. 한국은 겨울에 정말 춥다고 들었어요. [han-gu-geun gyeo-u-re jeong-mal chup-da-go deu-reo-sseo-yo.] = I heard that it’s very cold in winter in Korea.
8. TTMIK이 좋다고 쓰세요. [TTMIK-i jo-ta-go sseu-se-yo.] = Write that TTMIK is good.
** Bonus Sample Sentences (using -(ㄴ/는)다는 before nouns) 11. TTMIK이 재미있다는 이야기를 들었어요. [TTMIK-i jae-mi-it-da-neun i-ya-gi-reul deu-reo-sseo-yo.] = I heard (a story that) someone (was) saying that TTMIK is fun
Past Tense + Quoting Verb Stem + -았/었/였 + -다고 (+ 하다/말하다/이야기하다/듣다/etc) 했다고 말했어요. They said that they had done it.
어제 그 영화 봤다고 했어요? [eo-je geu yeong-hwa bwat-da-go hae-sseo-yo?] = Did you say that you saw that movie yesterday?
지갑을 잃어 버렸다고 들었는데, 찾았어요? [ ji-ga-beul i-reo beo-ryeot-da-go deu-reot-neun-de, cha-ja-sseo-yo?] = I heard that you lost your wallet. Did you find it? 학생이라고 말하다 = to say that he/she is a 학생 (student) 이 사람이 학생이라고 말하다 = to say that 이 사람 (this person) is a 학생 (student) 이 사람은 학생이라고 말하다 = to say that 이 사람 (this person) is a 학생 (student)
공짜라고 하다 = to say that something is free of charge 이 책이 공짜라고 하다 = to say that this book is free of charge 이 책은 공짜라고 하다 = to say that this book is free of charge
Future Tense + Quoting Verb Stem + -(으)ㄹ 거 + -라고 (+ 하다/말하다/이야기하다/듣다/etc 할 거라고 말했어요.  They said that they will do it
친구들이 도와 줄 거라고 했어요. [chin-gu-deu-ri do-wa jul geo-ra-go hae-sseo-yo.] = My friends told me that they would help me.
past 그가 선생님이었다 = He was a teacher 그가 선생님이었다고 했어요 = He said he was a teacher
거리에 있었던 사람들이 시위자들이었다 = The people who were on the street were protesters 경찰관은 거리에 있었던 사람들이 시위자들이었다고 했어요 = The police officer said that the people who were on the street were protesters
future l geoyeyo
저는 밖에 갈 수 없을 거라고 했어요 = I said I can’t go outside/won’t be able to go outside 제가 제일 좋아하는 여자를 가리킬 거라고 했어요 = I said that I will point to the girl that I like the most
usages In addition to 말하다, there are many verbs in Korean that prefer to be used with a quoted clause. I’d like to show you a few of them.
1) To think: 생각하다 저는 그 여자가 별로 안 예쁘다고 생각해요 = I think that girl isn’t that pretty 캐나다와 미국이 비슷하지 않다고 생각합니다 = I think Canada and the US aren’t similar 저는 이 소설가가 다른 소설가들보다 월등히 낫다고 생각합니다 = I think this novelist is much better than other novelists
2) To believe: 믿다 If one “believes” something, quoted can be used. For example: 저는 우리 팀이 이길 거라고 믿어요 = I believe that our team will win
3) To call something: 부르다 When talking about what an object is “called,” ~을/를 can be attached to the object, and ~(이)라고 can be attached to the word that it is referred to. For example:
사람들은 그 건물을 한국타워라고 불러요 = People call that building “Korea tower”
Using this type of sentence is a more natural way to tell somebody what your name is. The common way for foreigners to introduce themselves in Korean would be:
“제 이름은 김의지입니다”
Although correct, it is kind of a direct translation of “my name is…” in English. In Korean, it is more common/natural to introduce yourself using ~(이)라고. In most cases, you add something before your name to describe yourself even more. For example:
안녕하세요, 저는 캐나다에서 온 김의지라고 합니다 = Hi, my name is 김의지, and I come from Canada (I am 김의지, from Canada)
4) To promise: 약속하다 When “promising” to do an action, it is common to add a future tense quoted construction to the action you promise to do. For example: 현금을 내일 주겠다고 약속했다 = I promised to give you (the) cash tomorrow 제가 아빠에게 숙제를 다 할 거라고 약속했어요 = I promised dad that I would do all my homewor 이 정보를 내일까지 다 입력해 줄 거라고 약속했어요 = I promised that I would input all of this information by tomorrow
5) Finishing a sentence with 그렇다 Often times you will hear the final word of a sentence with a quote (instead of being 말하다, 하다 or any of the other words specified above) as 그렇다 오빠가 이거를 안 한다고 말했어 오빠가 이거를 안 한다고 했어 오빠가 이거를 안 한다고 그랬어
= My older brother said he wasn’t going to do this
It is also possible to use these quoted conjugations to ask what a person says. For example, if you want to ask what somebody said, you can attach ~(이)라고 to 뭐
뭐라고? = What did you say? 뭐라고요? = What did you say? 뭐라고 했어요? = What did you say? 뭐라고 말했어요? = What did you say? 아빠가 뭐라고 말했어요? = What did dad say?
저는 내일 캐나다에 갈 거예요 = I’m going to Canada tomorrow 내일 캐나다에 갈 거라고요? = (You said that) you’re going to Canada tomorrow?
그는 돈이 없다고 했어요 = He said that he doesn’t have money 돈이 있다고? = (Did you say) he has money? 아니요, 없다고요 = No, (I said that) he doesn’t have money
Using Quoted Sentences with ~는 것
Adding ~는 것 after any of these plain form conjugations is an abbreviation of a quoted clause.
간다는 것 is abbreviation of 간다고 하는 것 갔다는 것 is an abbreviation of 갔다고 하는 것 가겠다는 것 is an abbreviation of 가겠다고 하는 것
desc 너의 여자 친구가 예쁘다는 것을 잊어버렸어 = I forgot (the fact that) that your girlfriend was pretty
action
그가 나를 싫어하는 것을 알아 = I know that he doesn’t like me 그가 나를 싫어한다는 것을 알아 = I know that (it is said that) he doesn’t like me
In place of “것” in these cases, it is quite common to find the words “사실” (fact) and“소문” (rumor). These are often used because these are nouns whose meaning inherently implies that something was said. For example:
그 여자가 다른 남자랑 애기가 있다는 소문이 있습니다 = There is a rumor that that woman has a baby with another man
그 여자의 남편이 비서랑 바람을 피운다는 소문이 있어요 = There is a rumor that that woman’s husband is having an affair with his secretary
Instead of:
그 여자의 남편이 비서랑 바람을 피우는 것이 있어요 = There is a rumor that that woman’s husband is having an affair with his secretary
This same principle can be used in the past tense as well (remember to use the plain form):
그녀가 시험에 떨어졌다는 소문을 들었어요 = I heard a rumor that she failed the test 부장님이 작년에 미국에 갔다는 것을 잊어버렸어요 = I forgot (the fact) that the boss went to America last year
future with ida
-을 거 + 이다 + ~라고 하는 것 = -을 거라는 것
그녀가 곧 결혼할 거라는 사실을 잊어버렸어요 = I forgot (the fact that) that she will be getting married soon 대통령이 한국에서 떠날 거라는 소문이 있다 = There is a rumor that the president will leave Korea soon
II.Reporting a Question:
Action Verbs~(느)냐 + 고 (Speaking/Listening Verb) Descriptive Verb  ~(으)냐고 Quoting Questions with 이다
Examples of question related words 1. 묻다 [mut-da] = to ask 2. 물어보다 [mu-reo-bo-da] = to ask 3. 말하다 [ma-ra-da] = to say 4. 질문하다 [jil-mun-ha-da] = to ask a question
Question: 누구예요? (Who are you?) Verb in intimate interrogative: 누구냐 + 고 묻다. 누구냐고 물었어요. (She) asked who (I) am?
1. 학생이에요? = Are you a student? 학생이냐고 물어봤어요.They asked me if I was a student. / I asked her if she was a student.
2. 뭐예요? = What is it?   뭐냐고 물어봤어요. = She asked what this is. / I asked what it is. / They asked what that is.
3. 누가 그렇게 말했어요? = Who said so? → 누가 그렇게 말했냐고 → 누가 그렇게 말했냐고 물었어요. = I asked who said so. / They asked who said such a thing. *
왜 안 왔냐고 물어봤는데, 대답을 안 해요. [wae an wat-nya-go mu-reo-bwat-neun-de, dae-da-beul an hae-yo.] =  I asked him why he didn’t come here, but he won’t answer.
저한테 어디 가냐고 말했어요. [ jeo-han-te eo-di ga-nya-go ma-rae-sseo-yo.] = He asked me where I was going.
저는 몇 살이냐고 물어보는 게 제일 싫어요. [ jeo-neun myeot sa-ri-nya-go mu-reo-bo-neun ge je-il si-reo-yo.] =  I hate it the most when people ask me how old I am.
5. 저도 가야 되냐고 물어봐 주세요. [ jeo-do ga-ya doe-nya-go mu-reo-bwa ju-se-yo.] = Please ask them if I have to come along, too.그가 무엇을 좋아하느냐고 물어봤어요 = I asked him what he likes (another translation could be:)
우리 아빠는 나에게 어디 가느냐고 물어봤어 = My dad asked me where I am going 우리 아빠는 나에게 어디 갔느냐고 물어봤어 = My dad asked me where I went 우리 아빠는 나에게 어디 가겠느냐고 물어봤어 = My dad asked me where I will go
지진이 어떻게 생기느냐고 물어봤다 = I asked how earthquakes happen/occur 사위가 어디 갔느냐고 물어봤어요 = I asked where my son-in-law went 저는 부장님에게 우리가 그렇게 해야 하느냐고 물어봤어요 = I asked our boss if we had to do it like that
That being said, Korean people will be more inclined to say that ~냐고 (without ~느) looks and sounds more naturalPersonally, I suggest that you use the simple ~냐고 which is the form that is more commonly said by Korean speakers. ~냐고 is also the form that I have always used whenever I quote a question. However, you should keep in the back of your mind that the official usage is ~느냐고.
desc 아빠에게 지금 편안하냐고 물어봤어 = I asked my dad if he is/was comfortable/relaxed 저는 친구에게 그 여자가 예쁘냐고 물어봤어요 = I asked my friend if that girl was pretty 이런 반팔이 집에 많으냐고 물어봤어 = I asked if there were many of these types of t-shirts at home 그 사람이 나한테 앞날에 뭐 하고 싶으냐고 물어봤어 = That person asked me what I want to do in the future
~느냐고 should be attached when quoting a question with 있다 or 없다. they are verbs in this case not adjectives
Just like with other verbs, 있느냐 and 없느냐 are often spoken/written as 있냐 and 없냐 and would be seen as correct by Korean people.
Here are some examples: 저는 그에게 수영할 수 있느냐고 물어봤어요 = I asked him if he could swim 아빠에게 엄마를 왜 함부로 대하고 있느냐고 물어봤어요 = I asked dad why he is treating mom disrespectfully
ida 나는 그 사람이 우리 선생님이냐고 물어봤어 = I asked if that person is our teacher 방학이 언제(이)냐고 물어봤어 = I asked when vacation is 그곳이 어디(이)냐고 물어봤어 = I asked where that place is 그것이 뭐(이)냐고 물어봤어 = I asked what that thing is 그 사람이 누구(이)냐고 물어봤어 = I asked who that person is 이 신사가 누구냐고 물어봤습니다 = I asked who this gentlemen is/was 저는 제 친구에게 한국으로 이사하고 싶은 이유가 뭐냐고 물어봤어요 = I asked my friend ‘what is the reason you want to move to Korea?’ 제가 점원에게 그 핸드폰이 좋은 핸드폰이냐고 물어봤지만 그는 모른다고 했어요 = I asked the salesperson if that cellphone is good, but he said that he didn’t know 저 학교를 다니는 학생들이 똑똑한 학생들이냐고 물어봤어요 = He asked if the students who attend that school are smart students
Also notice that by adding ~(이)냐고 to 이다, you can ask questions in sentences that use the ~ㄹ 것이다 future tense conjugation. For example:
나는 그들에게 결혼식에 갈 거냐고 물어봤어 = I asked if they were going to go to the wedding 나는 그에게 어디 갈 거냐고 물어봤어 = I asked where he is going to go 저는 그에게 앞날에 뭐 할 거냐고 물어보고 싶어요 = I want to ask what he will do in the future 그는 저한테 여자친구랑 언제 결혼할 거냐고 물어봤어요 = He asked me when I will marry my girlfriend
III.Reporting an Imperative statement.
[-(으)라] + 고 (Speaking/Listening Verb) Negative Quoted Imperative Sentences: ~지 말라고
pos 선생님은 학생들에게 열심히 공부하라고 했어요 = The teacher told the students to study hard 버스 아저씨가 나한테 올라타라고 했어요 = The bus driver told me to get on (the bus) 회사를 자유롭게 운영하고 싶으면 혼자 하라고 했어요 = I told him that if he wants to run his business freely, to do it himself 저는 직원들에게 불만이 있으면 저에게 아무 때나 말을 하라고 했어요 = I told the workers that if they have a complaint (are dissatisfied), to talk to me anytime 우리가 오랜만에 만날 거라서 저는 친구에게 우리 집에 오라고 했어요 = It will be a long time since we last met, so I told him to come to our house 한국어실력을 늘리고 싶으면 선생님이 한국 사람들이랑 의사소통을 많이 하라고 그랬어요 = If I want to expand my Korean language ability, my teacher told me to communicate a lot with Korean people
neg 그렇게 하지 말라고 했어 = I told you not to do it like that 불을 만지지 말라고 했어 = I told you not to touch the fire 선생님은 수업에 늦게 오지 말라고 했어요 = The teacher told us not to come late to class 선생님이 복도에서 뛰지 말라고 했어요 = The teacher said not to run in the hallway 여자친구는 다른 여자와 대화를 하지 말라고 했어요 = My girlfriend told me not to talk to (have a conversation with) other girls 제가 공부하는 동안 저에게 얘기하지 말라고 그랬어요 = I told him not to speak to me while I’m studying 중요한 내용이 없어서 회의를 참석하지 말라고 했어요 = He told me to not attend the meeting because there is nothing important (no important content) 남자 친구에게 계속 과장하지 말라고 했지만 그는 한 달에 거의 500 만 원을 번다고 했어요 = I told my boyfriend to not exaggerate, but he said that he almost makes 500 만 원 per month
requesting
아/어/여 달라고 하다 (a/eo/yeo dallago hada)  to ask someone to do - - is a grammatical structure that expresses "to ask someone to do something." 달라고 can be changed to 주라고 (jurago) using the verb 주다 (juda – “to give”), but 달라고 is more common. 달라고 cannot be used in its dictionary form on its own and must be used with -고, the particle that expresses a reported speech, to form a sentence. The mood, tense and voice are expressed in the last verb, 하다 (hada). Here, 하다 means “to say,” so it can be replaced with 말하다 (malhada – “to say”), 얘기하다 (yaegihada – “to talk”), 요청하다 (yocheonghada – “to request”) or 요구하다 (yoguhada – “to demand”).
1. 남동생이 자꾸 놀아 달라고 해요. [놀다] (namdongsaeng-i jakku nora dallago haeyo) - My younger brother keeps asking me to play with him.
2. 엄마 아빠가 성적표 보여 달라고 하셨어요. [보이다] (eomma appa-ga seongjeokpyo boyeo dallago hasyeosseoyo) - My parents asked me to show them my report card.
3. 민경 씨가 전화해 달라고 했어요. [전화하다] (mingyeong ssi-ga jeonhwahae dallago haesseoyo) - Mingyeong wants you to call her back.
4. 비한테 안아 달라고 할 거예요. [안다] (bi-hante ana dallago hal geo-yeyo) - I will ask Rain to hug me.
5. 친구한테 숙제 도와 달라고 했어. [돕다] (chingu-hante sukje dowa dallago haesseo) - I asked my friend to help me with my homework달다 is sometimes translated to “request” in these situations. For example:
휴지를 달라고 했어요 = I said “please give me a tissue”
As I mentioned, it is also possible to use 달다 when the original speaker of a quoted sentence asks for an action to be done for him/her. In essence, 달다 replaces 주다 in ~아/어 주다 in these cases. For example: 학생은 선생님에게 성적을 올려 달라고 했어요 = The student said to the teacher “raise my grades” 다음 주에 입주할 거라서 그때 와 달라고 했어요 = We will be moving into the new house next week, so I told them to come then 어떤 공무원이 우리 집에 와서 설문조사를 답해 달라고 했어요 = Some government worker came to our house and requested that we answer a survey 그들에게 조용히 해 달라고 했지만 그들은 아직 너무 시끄러워요 = I told them to “please be quiet,” but they are still very loud
request with butag 저는 부탁이 하나 있어요 = I have one favor 저는 더 자세한 설명을 부탁했어요 = I asked for a clearer explanation 남편에게 청소를 부탁했어요 = I asked my husband to take care of the cleaning (for me) 빨래를 아들에게 부탁하고 집에서 나왔어요 = I asked my son to take care of the laundry for me and left the house 저는 신입사원에게 그 일을 부탁했어요 = I asked the new employee to take care of that work (for me)
In the example sentences so far, 부탁하다 has come after a noun. If the favor (or what you are requesting) is an action, you can attach ~아/어 달라고 to the verb, followed by 부탁하다
저는 그에게 더 자세히 설명해 달라고 부탁했어요 = I asked him to explain it more clearly One more peculiar thing about the word “부탁하다” is that it is often said as “부탁(을) 드리다
“드리다” is the honorific form of “주다” and is used when the receiving person deserves high respect. When using “부탁,” the person receiving the favor is you, and you should never use 드리다 when talking about yourself receiving something. The way I think about it is that I am giving a request to somebody, which would allow me to use 드리다. For example:
엄마에게 그것을 사 달라고 부탁 드렸어요 = I asked my mother to buy that for me
-지 말라고 하다-ji mal-lago hada to say not to do something
is used when "someone tells the subject NOT to (VERB)".  
말라 [mal-la] is an 'imperative ending' that means "do not", "should not", or "never". 고 하다 [go hada] is a phrase meaning, "tells that..." or "says that..."
Formation Verb Stem + - 지 말라고 하다 [ji malrago hada] 믿다 [mittda] "to believe or to trust" 믿지 말라고 하다 "(He) says (I) should NOT trust..."
말하다 [malhada] "to talk / to tell" 말하지 말라고 하다 "(He) says (I) should NOT tell..."
운전하다 [unjeonhada]"to drive" 운전하지 말라고 하다 "(She) says (I) should NOT drive..."
Example Sentences
그는 아무도 믿지 말라고 하였습니다. Geuneun a-mudo mitji malrago hayeosseumnida. "He told (me) not to trust anyone."
아버지는 (저에게) 술을 마시지 말라고 하셨습니다. Abeojineun (jeo-ege) sureul masiji malrago hasyeosseumnida. "My father told (me) that I should not drink (alcohol)."
친구가 아무한테도 비밀을 말하지 말라고 했습니다. Chinguga amuhantedo bimireul malhaji malrago haesseumnida. "My friend told (me) not to tell his secret to anyone." 어머니는 절대 술을 마시고 운전하지 말라고 하셨습니다. Eomeonineun jeoldae sureul masigo unjeonhaji malrago hasyeosseumnida. "My mother told (me) I should never drink and drive."
IV. Reporting a Propositive + 고 (Speaking/Listening Verb)
내일 공원에 가자 = Tomorrow, let’s go to the park 여자 친구가 공원에 가자고 했어 = My girlfriend said “let’s go to the park”
선생님이 수업 시간 동안 열심히 공부하자고 했어요 = The teacher said “let’s study hardduring class time”
-대요,-래-daeyo,-reyo 요They say
you learned the following grammar points: -(ㄴ/는)다고 -(이)라고 These are used for quoting what someone has said and are also used with verbs related to speech. In that lesson, the following sample sentences were introduced: 뭐라고 했어요? = What did they say? 내일 온다고 했어요. = They said they would come tomorrow. 언제 온다고 했어요? = When did they say they would come? 이거 재미있다고 들었어요. = I heard that this is fun.
You can make all of the above sentences shorter by using the endings -(ㄴ/는)다고 해요 --> -(ㄴ/는)대요 -(이)라고 해요 --> -(이)래요 Although it’s basically the same thing, the latter forms are more commonly used in everyday
Action Verbs present+ -(느)ㄴ대요 pas+ -았/었/였대요 [Future Tense] Verbs + -(으)ㄹ 거 + 래요
action Ex) 지금 간대요. (= They say they are going now.) Ex) 어제 만났대요. (= I heard they met yesterday.) 내일 만날 거래요. (= He says he will meet them tomorrow.)
Descriptive Verbs pres+ -대요 [Past Tense] Descriptive Verbs + -았/었/였대요 fuDescriptive Verbs + -(으)ㄹ 거 + 래요
Nouns + -(이)래요 Nouns + -이었/였대요   Nouns + -일 거 + 래요
바쁘대요. (= He says that he’s busy now.) no se 추울 거래요. (= They say it will be cold.)
친구래요. (= She says that he’s a friend.)학생이었대요. (= They say they were students.) 마지막일 거래요. (= They say it will be the last time.)
When you use the -(ㄴ/는)대요/-(이)래요 endings, you usually deliver a piece of information that the other person doesn’t know, or that you think they don’t know. If you want to emphasize the fact that YOU, at least, have heard something and it might not be the exact truth, you need to use verbs such as “듣다 (= to hear)” and say “-다고/라고 들었어요
Sample Sentences 간대요[gandaeyo] -They say they are going." or "He says he's leaving." 갔대요.[gatdaeyo] - "I heard that they went there."/"He says that he went there." 갈 거래요. [gal geo-raeyo]- "They say they will go."or "He says he will go.
학생이래요. [haksaeng-iraeyo]-"I heard he was a student." or "They say he's a student.
이게 제일 좋대요. [i-ge je-il jo-tae-yo.] = They say that this is the best.
여기 정말 유명하대요. [yeo-gi jeong-mal yu-myeong-ha-dae-yo.] = They say this place is really famous.
몰랐대요. [mol-lat-dae-yo.] = He says he didn’t know
어딘지 모른대요. [eo-din-ji mo-reun-dae-yo.] = He says he doesn’t know where it is.
이 사람 정말 유명한 사람이래요. [i sa-ram jeong-mal yu-myeong-han sa-ra-mi-rae-yo.] = They say this person is a very famous person.
제 친구가 한국에 올 거래요. [ je chin-gu-ga han-gu-ge ol geo-rae-yo.] = My friend says he will come to Korea.
그 사람은 한국에 와 본 적이 없대요. [geu sa-ra-meun han-gu-ge wa bon jeo-gi eop-dae-yo.] = He says he’s never come to Korea
길 건너편에 우리 카페랑 비슷한 카페가 생겼대요![Gil geonneopyeon-e uri kape-rang biseutan kape-ga saenggyeotdaeyo!] -I heard that someone made a cafe similar to our cafe across the street.
2. 이름도 비슷하고, 분위기도 비슷하고, 메뉴도 비슷하대요![Ireum-do biseuthago, bunwigi-do biseuthago, menyu-do biseuthadaeyo!] -I heard that the name is similar, the atmosphere is similar, and the menu is similar too!
3. 전에 우리 카페에서 일했던, 민수가 만들었대요![Jeon-e uri kape-eseo ilhaetdeon, minsu-ga mandeureotdaeyo!] -I heard that Minsu, who used to work in our cafe, made that one.
This structure is translated as "I heard that..." or "They say that..." -대요 (daeyo) originally comes from -다고 (말)해요 (-dago (mal)haeyo), and for the present tense you add ㄴ and make it -ㄴ대요 (-ndaeyo), and for the past tense, you add 았/었/였 and make it -았/었/였대요 (-at/eot/yeotdaeyo). But with nouns, however, since the original form of the reported speech is [ noun + -(이)라고 (말)해요 ], you use the -(이)라고 ((i)rago) part and change it to -(이)래요 ((i)raeyo) instead of -대요 (daeyo). And this is applied to the future tense, too, because the word -거 (geo) in the future tense ending -ㄹ/을 거예요 (l/eul geo-yeyo) is a noun as well.
. -(ㄴ/는)다던데(요) and 2. -(이)라던데(요)They say -Answer required review   1. 제 친구가 지금 바빠요. = My friend is busy now. → 제 친구가 지금 바쁘대요. = My friend says that she is busy now.
2. 이게 제일 좋은 거예요. = This is the best one. → 이게 제일 좋은 거래요. = They say that this is the best on
지금 와요. = She’s coming now. 지금 온대요. = She says she’s coming now. 지금 온다던데요. = She says she’s coming now. (+ (ex) Should we wait?/What do you think?)
유명해요. = He’s famous. 유명하대요. = They say he’s famous. 유명하다던데요. = They say he’s famous. (+ (ex) But you said otherwise, right?)
* The same applies to -(이)래(요) and -(이)라던데(요).
학생이에요. = He’s a student. 학생이래요. = He says he’s a student. 학생이라던데요. = He says he’s a student. (+ (ex) What shall we do then?)
공원이에요. = They are at a park. / It is a park. 공원이래요. = They say they are at a park. 공원이라던데요. = They say they are at a park. (+ (ex) Shall we go there?)
Difference between -(ㄴ/는)다던데(요) and -(ㄴ/는)다는데(요) There is a slight difference in nuance between -던데 and -는데, and it’s based on the fact that -던 is usually associated with the past tense whereas -는 is associated with the present tense.
지금 온다던데요. = They said that they would come here now. 지금 온다는데요. = They are saying that they will come here now.
유명하다던데요. = I heard that she’s famous. 유명하다는데요. = He is saying that she’s famous.
* The same applies to -(이)래(요), -(이)라던데(요) and -(이)라는데(요).
학생이라던데요. = They told me that they were students. 학생이라는데요. = They say that they are students.
공원이라던데요. = They said that they were at a park. 공원이라는데요. = They say that they are at a park.
Sample Sentences 여기 위험하다던데요. [yeo-gi wi-heom-ha-da-deon-de-yo.] = I heard that this place is dangerous. (+ (ex) What do you think?)
혼자 갈 거라던데요. [hon-ja gal geo-ra-deon-de-yo.] = She said she would go there alone. (+ (ex) Shall I talk to her again? / You can’t go with her.) 3.
그 사람도 모른다던데요. [geu sa-ram-do mo-reun-da-deon-de-yo.] = He said that he doesn’t know either. (+ (ex) So why keep asking him?
17 notes · View notes
korean-layout · 7 years ago
Text
l
l
로그인하다 = to log inlogin hada
0 notes
korean-layout · 7 years ago
Text
stay
nn
1 note · View note
korean-layout · 7 years ago
Text
Words
n
Very
Casual
되게 - quite
꽤 = quite (sense of suprise)
정말 [jeong-mal] - formal,진짜 jinjja - informal really
너무too (x) but also used as just “very”
많이 - very
엄청 ( 엄청나게) tremendously
어마어마하게 incredibly
Formal
상당히 - quite 
굉장히 - very
아주 - very 
매우 - very 
대단히- tremendously
+
참 = really/very/extremelycham truly
Examples
Casual
되게 재미있었어요- It was quite fun
꽤 비싸요 (Oh,) It’s quite expensive
진짜 예뻐요   - It’s really pretty
정말 도움이 됩니다 It’s really helpful
정말 이상하네요 - Yeah, I see that it’s really weird / I agree that it’s really weird
정말  이게 더 좋다니까요 - Seriously, I said this one is better
너무 pyeonhaeyo - It’s very comfortable
많이 - manhi chueoyo? Is it very cold?
엄청 chueoyo It’s tremendously cold
엄청 어려웠어요 It was tremendously difficult
어마어마하게 incredibly
eomaeomahage It snowed  tremendously lot
incredibly tall mountain
Formal
상당히 - quite
굉장히 - very
아주 멀어요.[a-ju meo-reo-yo.] It’s very far away.
매우 - very
대단히 - thank you very much
+
neomu manhayo its too much
manhi juseyo give me a lot
don manhi juseyo give me a lot of money
chaeg manhi juseyo give me a lot of books
seonmul manhi juseyo give me a lot of presents
혼자 honja = alone
스스로 = for oneself/by oneself
홀로 = by oneself
따로 = separately, privately
같이gati,함께 hamggetogether
조금jogeum, jom a little bit 많이manhi a lot 그냥 = just 쯤= approximately 원래 = originally 오히려 = on the contrary 너무나 = extremely 여러 = many/various 주로juro for the most part
더 - more 덜 - less 불과 - only 무려 - as many as 가장 - most
마음껏 = as much as one likes 더욱 = more and more
처음:  - "first time / first occasion". 처음에: first, 처음으로(for the first time), 처음부터(from the start)  일단: as a first step. Once something happens/occurs...  먼저:  before anyone / anything else. jinnan ,저번 last as in previous daeum next 마지막 - majimag last
혹시 hogsi by any chance amado,,eojjeomyeon   su issda maybe 정말 [jeong-mal] - formal,,진짜 jinjja - informal really 별로 [byeol-lo] = not really,  사실 sasil in fact 솔직히 honestly 특히 teughi  especially
과연 = indeed/sure enough
꼭 = surely/definitely
반드시 = surely/definitely
아예 = not at all
절대로 - absolutly
철저히 = thoroughly
겨우 - 거의 -간신히- 가까스로- barely
상당히- quite 진짜로- really 실제로- really 잘, 제대로- well
외에 = in addition to 및 = as well as (Korea as well as Canada) 또한 = also/as well 상관없이 = regardless 아무래도 = probably 어쩌면 = maybe, perhaps 왠지 = for some reason 우연히 = by chance 아마 = probably 혹은 = o
대체로 = generally/overall
주로- mostly 전적으로- absolutely
정작 = actually, really 약간- 살짝 = slightly= slightly/a little bit 반드시 = surely/definitely 대체로 = generally/overall
하여튼, 여하튼, 어쨌든 amuteun anyways 어차피 eochapi anyway
본능적으로 = instinctively
빨리 balli quickly
천천히cheoncheonhi slowly
단순히 - simply
대충 = roughly, ohne mühe
대략 = roughly
딱 = exactly, perfectly, precisely
뜻밖에 = unexpectedly
엄청 - enormously
엄청나게 = enormously/tremendouslly
깊이 = deeply
골고루 = evenly
고르게 = evenly, flatly
깨끗이 = neatly
꼼꼼히 = meticulously/precisely
함부로 = disrespectfully/carelessly
흔히 = commonly
일부러 = on purpose
인공적으로 = artificially
제대로 = properly
자세히= detailed/elaborate/carefully
마지못해 = reluctantly 
몹시 = heavily/badly/really bad
모르게 = unknowingly
무조건 = unconditionally
남몰래 = secretly
완전히 - perfectly
신중하게- carefully
술술 = smoothly
순전히 = purely
순순히 = obediently
운명적으로 = fatefully
열심히yeolsimhi diligently
연속으로 = in a row/consecutively
유심히 = attentively, closely
깜짝 = an adverb used to show surprise
얼른 = adverb placed in sentences when speaker wants listener to do something quickly
---
깊다 - to be deep 깊숙이 - deep 다른 - other, different 무료 = free 꽉 - tight
가만히 = to be still, to be motionless
짜리 = the one worth..
어떤 = which 어떤= some 무슨 = what kind of 어느 = which
얼마나 = how much 몇 = how many ___
어때? = How is/was … ?
며칠 = how many days
닥쳐 = shut up
나중에 또 봐요 = see you later
글쎄 = well…/let me see…
물론 = of course
등 = etc…
따위 = etc…
즉 = i.e./in other words…
덕분 = thanks to
기타 = and other, and so on
그중of those things
짜리 = the one worth.. 
몇몇 = some
이내 = within
결코 = put with negative sentences to stress
왜냐하면 = because
어쨌든 = at any rate, in any case, anyways
가짜 = fake
실제 = actual
워낙 = so/very, by nature
너머 = beyond, over
굉장히 = very
한층 = much more
이상 = more than 대부분 = most
적발 시 = if caught 박 = counter for nights
일회용 = one time use 최선 = the best way or plan
도 = temperature, degrees
영하 = below zero (temperature)
영상 = above zero (temperature)
한가운데 = in the very middle
중앙 = middle/center
정상 = top 전체 = whole/entire thing 야생 = wild (wild ____ animal) 일부 = a part/portion 최고 = the best/first
힘내 = cheer up
각 = each
각각 = each and every
각자 = each individual
정성껏 = putting your heart into something
새로 = newly/anew 주요 = major/primary”
도중 = in the middle of 소용이 없다 = for there to be no use 똑바로 = straight/upright 어김없이 = without fail 도저히 = stresses a ~ㄹ 수 없다 sentence
금색 = gold (color) 은색 = silver (color) 주황색 = orange (color)
---
역시 or 역시나 basically means “I knew it!” “That’s what I thought.” “as expected” You can use them interchangeably in most cases. But when you use the word 역시 to say “ “What you’ve done is just as good as I expected!” you can’t use 역시나 instead of 역시.
별로 [byeol-lo] = not really,
1. 별로 안 비싸요. [byeol-lo an bi-ssa-yo.] = It’s not so expensive. 2. 별로 재미없어요. [byeol-lo jae-mi-eop-seo-yo.] = It’s not that interesting.
Formation There are two ways to use 별로 with a negative component.
1. Used with a negative adverb (안, 못)
별로 안 바쁘다 = not very busy, not especially busy, not particularly busy
별로 못 하다 = can’t particularly do (not particularly good at), can’t especially do (not especially good at)
2. Used with a negative sentence ending. -지 않다 (negative sentence ending)
별로 크지 않다. = Not especially big, not particularly big.
Example Sentences (a) 별로 크지 않다. - It is not particularly big.
(b) 이 책은 별로 비싸지 않아요. - This book is not too expensive.
© 저는 시간이 별로 없습니다. - I don’t have much time.
(d) 그 사람은 친구가 별로 없어요. - He doesn’t have many friends.
별로 안 좋아요. Byeollo an joayo. “It’s not so good.”
별로 안 하고 싶어요. Byeollo an hago sipeoyo. “I’m not particularly in the mood to do it.”
dasi again dasi haseyo do it again –  repeat action all over again
ddo 또 (tto) is the word that means “again,” and just like in English, this word can give off various nuances depending on the tone of speech by the speaker.
Examples:
 1. If you say it plainly, it just means “again” or “once more For example:     A. 또 보자!  (Tto boja!) "See you again!” (intimate)  2. If you say it with a rising tone, you can express sarcasm or surprise, like in this lesson’s dialogue.     A. 아이스크림 먹자. (Aiseukeurim meokja.) “Let’s eat ice cream.” (intimate)     B. 또??? (Tto???) “Again???” (intimate)
Example Sentences 또 저예요. (tto jeo-yeyo.) “It’s me again.”
hoksi혹시 (hoksi)
1.혹시 현대 아파트 어디 있는지 아세요? (By any chance, do you know where Hyundai Apartment is?)
2.혹시, 지민경 씨 맞아요? (By any chance, are you Ji Min Kyeong?)
3.혹시, 이 길 아니야? (By any chance, is it this street?)
really 정말 [jeong-mal] - formal
정말요 [jeong-malyo] - really?
정말 빨라요. [jeong-mal ppallayo.]   It’s really fast.
정말 이상해요. [jeong-mal i-sang-hae-yo.]  It’s really strange.
진짜 jinjja - informal
A 씨: 나 백만원 땄어! (na baekman-won ttasseo!) I won ₩1,000,000!
B 씨: 설마! (seolma!) - no way A 씨: 진짜! (jinjja!) – really
저는 신라면을 진짜 좋아해요 (jeo-neun sinramyun-eul jinjja johahaeyo) - I really like Shin ramyun
in fact
In fact…“ “Actually…” “In reality…” 1. 미안한데, 사실은 니가 먹은 거 유통기한이 지났어. [먹다] [지나다] (mianhande, sasil-eul ni-ga meogeun geo yutonggihan jinasseo) Sorry, but in fact what you ate is past the expiry date.
2. 실은, 유럽에 갔다 왔다는 말은 거짓말이었어. [가다] [오다] (sil-eun, yureob-e gatda watda-neun mal-eun geojitmal-ieosseo) In fact, I said that I went to Europe but it was a lie.
3. 사실은, 이 꽃은 너를 위해서 가져온 거야. [가져오다] (sasil-eun i kkoch-eun neo-reul wihaeseo gajyeoon geo-ya) In fact, I brought these flowers for you.
4. 사실은, 그 사람이 너한테는 말하지 말라고 부탁했어. [부탁하다] (sasil-eun geu saram-i neo-hanteneun malhaji mallago butakhaesseo) In fact, he asked me not to tell you.
5. 사실은, 내가 외계인이어서 너를 사랑할 수가 없어. [사랑하다] (sasil-eun, nae-ga oegyein-ieoseo neo-reul saranghal su-ga eopseo)
In fact, I’m an alien so I can’t love yo
일단 firstly 1) 처음: (noun/adverb) literally means "first time / first occasion". * 처음에: first, 처음으로(for the first time), 처음부터(from the start) * Emphasis is on "the first stage" of something, not comparison with others 2) 일단: (adverb) as a first step. Once something happens/occurs... * stresses "doing/acting/happening without thinking/preparing too much". 3) 먼저: (adverb) before anyone / anything else. * implies "before something/someone else"
Examples can show their different usages. - 난 처음에 네가 남자인 줄 알았어: In the beginning(at first sight) I thought you were a man. - 이 일은 처음부터 잘못됐어: This matter went wrong from the beginning. - 처음 느낌 그대로..: Just the way we felt in the beginning.. - 처음 본 사람: a man I saw for the first time.
- 일단 점심부터 먹자: Let's first have lunch (and then do other things). - 그는 일단 시작하면 멈추지 않는자: Once he gets started, he won't stop.
- 너 먼저 가: You leave first (before I do). - 닭이 먼저냐 달걀이 먼저냐: Which came first, the chicken or the egg. - 먼저 할 일, 나중(에) 할 일: Things to do first, things to do later.
Examples
전혀 안 바빠요. [jeon-hyeo an ba-ppa-yo.] = I’m not busy at a
너무 커요.[neo-mu keo-yo] It’s too big.너무 비싸요. [neo-mu bi-ssa-yo] = It’s too expensive..너무 바빠요. [neo-mu ba-ppa-yo.] = I’m too busy. / I’m very busy.너무 is usually combined with adjectives but it can also be used with verbs as well. 너무 보고 싶어요. [neo-mu bo-go si-peo-yo.] = I miss you/him/her/them so much.이 영화 너무 재밌어.i yeonghwa neomu jaemisseo.“This movie is so good.”영어 너무 어려워요.yeongeo neomu eoryeowoyo. “English is too difficult.”키가 너무 커. 싫어.ki-ga neomu keo. silheo. “He’s too tall. I don’t like him.”
0 notes
korean-layout · 7 years ago
Text
Bank
n
Focus #1 - Bank - 은행 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- - 은행 (eunhaeng) = bank - 은행에 가다 = to go to the bank - 은행에 가야 돼요. = I have to go to the bank.
▶ The names of some major banks in Korea ◀ 국민은행 (gukmin eunhaeng) - "People Bank" 하나은행 (hana eunhaeng) - "One Bank" 제일은행 (jeil eunhaeng) - "Number One Bank" 우리은행 (uri eunhaeng) - "Our Bank"
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Vocab Focus #2 - Cash - 현금 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- - 현금 (hyeongeum) = cash - 현금 is also called 현찰 (hyeonchal)
- 돈 (don) - money - 지폐 (jipye) - note, bill - 동전 (dongjeon) - coin - 수표 (supyo) - check - 신용카드 (sinyongkadeu) - credit card - 잔돈 (jandon) - small change - 거스름돈 (geoseureumdon) - change that you receive
- 현금으로 내다 - to pay by cash - 현금으로 주다 - to give cash (insteaed of a present)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Vocab Focus #3 - Bank Account - 계좌 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- - 계좌 (gyejwa) = bank account - 계좌 is also called 구좌 (gujwa)
- 통장 (tongjang) = bank book - 통장에 돈을 넣다 literally means 'to put money into one's bank book' but it actually means 'to put money into one's account'
- 출금 (chulgeum) - withdrawal - 출금하다 (chulgeumhada) - to withdraw money - 뽑다 (ppopda) - to pull out, to take out, to get ou - 돈을 뽑다 = 출금하다 = to withdraw money
- 입금 (ipgeum) - deposit - 입금하다 (ipgeumhada) - to deposit money - 넣다 (neota) - to put in, to insert - 돈을 넣다 = 입금하다 = to deposit money
- 현금이 없어서 돈을 뽑아야 해요. = I don't have any cash so I have to withdraw moeny. - 10만원을 계좌에 넣었어요. = I deposited 100,000 won in my account.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Vocab Focus #4 - Wire Transfer - 이체 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- - 이체 (iche) = wire transfer - 이체 is also often calleㅇ 계좌 이체 (gyejwa iche) or 송금 (songgeum).
송금 - (send + money) = money transfer 송금하다 = to send money
- When sending money over the Internet, you usually pay no or little 수수료 (service charge).
--------------------------- ▶ Hanja Vocabulary ◀ --------------------------- 입(入) - to enter - 입금 (enter + money) = deposit - 입학 (enter + study) = entering school - 입장 (enter + place) = entrance, appearance
출(出) - to go out, to get out - 출금 (get out + money) = withdrawal - 외출 (outside + go out) = going outside, going out - 출장 (go out + place) = business trip
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ♣ More Bank Vocabulary ♣ --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- - 금액 (geumaek) - amount of money - 계좌 번호 (gyejwa beonho) - account number - 비밀 번호 (bimil beonho) - password - 보안 (boan) - security - 이자 (ija) - interest - 보험 (boheom) - insuranc
Vending Machine - 자판기 -------------------------------------------------------------------- ▶ 자동판매기 = 자판기 ▶ 자동 = automatic ▶ 판매 = sale ▶ 기 = 기계 = machine
--------------------------------- ♣ Sample Expressions ♣ --------------------------------- - 이 근처에 자판기 있어요? (Is there a vending machine near here?) - 자판기가 고장났어요. (The vending machine is broken.) - 자판기가 돈을 먹었어요. (The vending machine just took my money.) - 자판기에서 음료수를 사 올게요. (I'll get some drinks from the vending machine.) - 자판기 음료수가 모두 품절이에요. (All the drinks in the vending machines are sold out.)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Vocab Focus #2 - Beverage - 음료(수) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ▶ 자판기에서 파는 음료수의 종류 (Kind of Beverages Available from Vending Machines) - 커피 (coffee) - 스포츠 음료 (sports beverage) - 주스 (juice) - 녹차 (green tea) - 탄산 음료 (soda) - 비타민 음료 (vitamin drink) - 밀크티 (milk tea) - 핫초코 = 코코아 (hot chocolate) - 유자차 (citron tea)
--------------------------------- ♣ Sample Expressions ♣ --------------------------------- - 목 말라요. 음료수 마시고 싶어요. (I'm thirsty. I want to have something to drink.) - 더우니까 음료수 드시고 하세요. (It's hot so please have something to drink before you continue working.)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Vocab Focus #3 - Coin - 동전 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ▶ 동전 지갑 = coin wallet ▶ 동전 투입구 = coin slot
--------------------------------- ♣ Sample Expressions ♣ --------------------------------- - 지폐를 동전으로 바꿔 주세요. (Please change the bills to coins.) - 동전이 없는데, 지폐로 내도 되나요? (I have no coins. Can I pay in bills?) - 동전 밖에 안 들어가요. (You can only insert coins.) - 주머니에 구멍이 나서, 동전을 다 흘렸어요. (I have a hole in my pocket so all the coins dropped through it.)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Vocab Focus #4 - To Insert - 넣다 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ▶ 넣다 = to insert ▶ 꺼내다 = to take out
--------------------------------- ♣ Sample Expressions ♣ --------------------------------- - 돈을 지갑에 넣으세요. (Please put the money into the wallet.) - 어디에 넣을까요? (Where do you want me to put it in?) - 핸드폰을 어디에 넣었어요? (Where did you put the cellphone in?) - 책을 가방에 넣었어요. (I put the books into the bag.) - 돈을 은행에 넣고 싶어요. (I want to put money into the bank.)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Vocab Focus #5 - To Press - 누르다 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ▶ 버튼 = button ▶ 버튼을 누르다 = to press the button ▶ 버튼을 세게 누르다 = to press the button strongly ▶ 버튼을 잘못 누르다 = to press the wrong button
--------------------------------- ♣ Sample Expressions ♣ --------------------------------- - 비밀번호를 눌러 주세요. (Please press your password.) - 여기를 누르면, 컴퓨터가 켜져요. (If you press here, the computer is turned on.) - 어디를 눌러야 되나요? (Where should I press?) - 여기를 누르면 어떻게 되나요? (What happens if I press here?) - 번호를 천천히 눌러 주세요. (Please press the numbers slowly.)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Vocab Focus #6 - To Come Out - 나오다 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ▶ 나오다 = to come out ▶ 나가다 = to go out ▶ 들어오다 = to come in ▶ 들어가다 = to go in
--------------------------------- ♣ Sample Expressions ♣ --------------------------------- - 빨리 나와! (Come out quickly!) - 이거 어디에서 나온 돈이에요? (Where did this money come out from?) - 그 남자는 몇 시에 집에서 나왔어요? (At what time did the man come out of the house?) - 내일도 학교에 나오세요? (Do you come (out) to school tomorrow too?) - 집에서 나오지 마세요. (Don't come out of your house.
어디서 환전 할 수 있어요?' eodiseo hwanjeon hal su itsseoyo? "Where can I exchange the money?"
얼마 환전하세요? eolma hwanjeonhaseyo? "How much you would like to exchange?"
2 notes · View notes
korean-layout · 7 years ago
Text
Directions
n
Where is it? - 어디예요? 편의점이) 어디예요? (Pyeonuijeom-i) eodi-yeyo? Where is (the convenience store)?
지하철역이 어디예요?(jihacheoryeogi eodiyeyo?)Where is the subway station 쭉 가세요.(jjuk gaseyo.)Go straight.' 오른쪽으로 도세요.(oreunjjogeuro doseyo.)Turn right.' 왼쪽으로 도세요.(oenjjogeuro doseyo.)'Turn left.
Go right at the light."신호에서 오른쪽으로 가세요 신호 is Korean for "Signal." As in, "Traffic signal." 사거리에서 오른쪽으로 가세요. "Turn right at the intersection, 사거리, intersection, 횡단 보도에서 오른쪽으로 가세요. "Turn right at the crosswalk." 횡단 보도. crosswalk
'오른쪽에 학교가 나와요' oreunjjoke hakgyoga nawayo "A school will appear on your right"
destination is "On the right," you can say 오른쪽에 있어요. "It's on the left" would be 왼쪽에 있어요.
1.앞에 있어요. (ap-e isseoyo.) (It)'s in front.
2.뒤에 있어요. (dwi-e isseoyo.) (It)'s behind.
3.오른쪽에 있어요. (oreunjjok-e isseoyo.) (It)'s to the right.
4.왼쪽에 있어요. (oenjjok-e isseoyo.) (It)'s to the left.
5.옆에 있어요. (yeop-e isseoyo.) (It)'s to the side./(It)'s next to (it).
(2) 지하철 역 앞에 - Jihacheol yeok ap-e - (앞+에) -In front of the subway station.
(4) 은행 뒤에 - Eunhaeng dwi-e - (뒤+에) -Behind the bank.
(6) 편의점 옆에 - Pyeonuijeom yeop-e - (옆+에) -Next to the convenience store.
1)류지: 아저씨… 경찰서가 어디예요? (1)Ryuji: Mister, where is the police station? (2)아저씨: 경찰서? 지하철 역 앞에 있어. (2)Man: The police station? It's in front of the subway station. (3)류지: 아줌마… 경찰서가 어디예요? (3)Ryuji: Ma'am, where is the police station? (4)아줌마: 경찰서? 은행 뒤에 있어. Woman: The police station? It's behind the bank. (5)류지: 아저씨… 경찰서가 어디예요? (5)Ryuji: Mister, where is the police station? (6)아저씨2: 편의점 옆에 있어요. (6)Man 2: It's next to the convenience store. (7)류지: 편의점 오른쪽에 있어요? (8)아저씨2: 아니요, 왼쪽에 있어요. (8)Man 2: No, it's to the left. (9)류지: 아… 여기다! (9)Ryuji: Ah, it's here!
0 notes
korean-layout · 7 years ago
Text
Restaurant
n
자리 있어요? Debbie: Is there an (empty) table?
이 자리는 어때요? I jarineun eottaeyo? "How about this table?" 아니요, 저 자리는 어때요? Aniyo, jeo jarineun eottaeyo? "Nope, how about that table?"
웨이터: 예.. 그럼 저기 앉으세요. Debbie: Yes... (You may) sit there then.
몇 분 이세요? myeot bun iseyo? "How many people?"
두명이에요 "We're two people." Don't say 분 or 이세요, as it's weird to exalt yourself in Korean!
지금 자리가 없어요.' jigeum jariga eopsseoyo "There is no seat available right now."
이쪽으로 오세요 literally means "Please come toward this side. 잠시만 기다리세요. "Please wait a little bit 얼마나 걸려요? "How long will it take?" 죄송하지만 다음에 올게요."Thanks, but I'll come here again.
f you're dining alone, when the waiter asks how many you are, you can say either 한명이에요 "I'm one person" or 혼자예요
흡연석 드릴까요? (heubyeonseok deulilkkayo?Shall I give you a table in the smoking section? 금연석 드릴까요? (geumyeonseok deulilkkayo?). And, you guessed it! This phrase means "Shall I give you a table in the non-smoking section? geumyeonseok juseyo. "non-smoking seat, please."
저기요 (jeogiyo) 메뉴판 주세요.(menupan juseyo.)
무엇을 드릴까요? mueoseul deurilkkayo? "What can I get for you?"
'주문하시겠어요?' jumunhashigetsseoyo? "Would you like to order?"
저희, 이제 주문할게요! jeohui, ije jumunhalgeyo! "We'll order now!"
뭐가 맛있어요" (mwo-ga massisseoyo) 어떤 거 추천하시나요?(eotteon geo chucheonhasinayo?)'What do you recommend?
'이거 주세요 (igeo juseyo). caikeu juseyo 반찬 좀 더 가져다 주실래요?(banchan jom deo gajeoda jusillaeyo?'Can you bring more side dishes, please 그리고 소주 두 병 주세요. geurigo soju du byeong juseyo "Also could we get two bottles of soju, please?" 소주는 어떤 것으로 드릴까요?Which type of soju can I get you?
맛있게드세요, literally "Please eat deliciously," means "Enjoy your meal." rest
잘 먹겠습니다 (jal meokgess-seumnida). i will eat well
.' 맛있어요" (massisseoyo)
계산서 주세요 (gyesanseo juseyo), or "check, please. gyeseanseo gatda jusillaeyo could you bring the bill please 계산할게요 ' gyesanhalgeyo "I will pay" 어디서 계산해요?(eodiseo gyesanhaeyo?)‘Where can I pay the bill?’ 이번에는 제가 살게요.(ibeoneneun jega salgeyo) it means "I will buy this time" or "I will treat you." 카드로 계산해도 돼요?kadeuro gyesanhaedo dwaeyo?"Can I pay with my credit card?" 카드 되나요? means "Can I pay by card? 저기요, 잔돈이 틀려요.(jeogiyo, jandoni teullyeoyo.)'Excuse me, the change is wrong. 잔돈은 됐어요.(jandoneun doesseoyo.)Keep the change When handling money in Korea, it's always important to give and receive with two hands. This displays respect, and Koreans expect it in almost any situation where money is involved. This includes credit cards as well. So any time you hand a bill back to the restaurant staff, make sure it's with two hands.
잘 먹었습니다.' jal meogeosseumnida. "Thank you for the meal.(lit. I ate well.)" This literally means "I ate well" and expresses your gratitude to your friends for treating with you or eating with you. You can also use it to thank a waiter or cook for a tasty meal
아주머니, 여기 주문이요. 직원: 뭘로 드릴까요? 마크: 김치 찌개 하나랑, 순두부 찌개 하나 주세요. 캐런: 아, 물도 하나 주세요.Oh, a glass of water too, please. 물은 셀프입니다.All water is self-serve.
아주머니, 저희 김치 좀 더 주세요.Excuse me, please give us more Kimchi. Jaehwi: Now with English. Mark: Excuse me, we’ll order now. Staff member: What would you like? Mark: One Kimchi stew, and one soft tofu stew, please.
delivery 여보세요., 종로 치킨입니다. 마크 (Mark): 아 여보세요. 배달되나요? 점원 (Staff): 네 됩니다. 마크 (Mark): 그럼 양념치킨 한 마리 가져다 주세요. 점원 (Staff): 양념 하나요? 마크 (Mark): 네. 점원 (Staff): 주소 말씀해주세요. 마크 (Mark): 하나오피스텔 304호요. 점원 (Staff): 하나오피스텔 304호요? 알겠습니다. Jaehwi: Now with English. 점원 (Staff): Hello. This is Jongro Chicken. 마크 (Mark): Hello. Do you deliver? 점원 (Staff): Yes, we deliver. 마크 (Mark): Then could I get one order of seasoned spicy chicken, please? 점원 (Staff): One seasoned spicy chicken, right? 마크 (Mark): Right. 점원 (Staff): Your address, please. 마크 (Mark): Hana Officetel, Room 304. 점원 (Staff): Hana O fficetel, Room 304. Okay.
0 notes
korean-layout · 7 years ago
Text
Hanja
n
人 인 = Person 인간 human 성인 adult 외국인 foreigner
語어 language 스페인어 spanish 프랑스어 french 중국어 chinese
國국 = Country 한국hangug korea 미국migug usa 중국junggug china
局국gug - office 우체국uchegug post office 방송국 broadcasting station
球구 ball 농구Basketball 축구Soccer 배구Volleyball.
車 = 차 = Car 자동차 (jadongcha, “automobile”) 경찰차 police car
주車 = parking 주車場 = parking lot 車도 = a road 기차  train (usually a long-distance train) 열車 = train (usually a subway train)
學 = 학 = Learn/School 학교 school 학생 student 수학 maths
門 = 문 = Door 창문 , changmun, “window”) 대문 (, daemun, “gate”)
동대문= Dongdaemun (major area in Seoul, refers to the “big east door/gate” 남대문 = Namdaemun (major area in Seoul, refers to the “big south door/gate”
Many of the famous sightseeing attractions in Seoul are old “gates” (doors) around the city. The names of these attractions/gates in Korea are usually “___ ___ 문.”
感 = 감 = Feeling/Emotion 感정 = emotion 感각 = sense/feeling 感동 = impression
金 =김/금 = Common Surname, Gold/Money 요금 = charge/fare 황 금= gold 현금 = cash beolgeum - fine jeogeum savings
電 = 전 = Electricity 電철 = subway/metro 電기 = electricity 충電하다 = to charge 電話하다 = to phone 電話기 = telephone
敎 = 교 = Teach 敎室 = classroom 敎師 = teacher 敎육  = education 敎과  = subject 敎직員 = teacher 敎수 = professor 종敎 = religion
0 notes
korean-layout · 7 years ago
Text
Index
index
I grammar
Pronouns
Plural - Numbers - Counters
Particles
Particles B
ii grammar
Infinitive
Verbs to Adjectives
Verbs to Nouns
Ability
- ㄹ/ - 을 줄 알다   -l/eul jul alda - to know how to - ㄹ/ - 을 줄 모르다-l/eul jul  moreuda - to not know how to
- ㄹ/ - 을 수 있다[-(eu)l su it-da] - can - ㄹ/ - 을 수 없다[-(eu)l su eobsda] - cant
못 + verb  mot+verb cant
~을/를 못 하다  Eul, reul mot hada Cant do  
잘 + verb to do well  To be good at
~을/를 잘 하다  Eul, reul jal hada  to do well  To be good at
잘 못 하다Eul, reul jal mot hada  Cant do well 
Advice
Causative
Changes
Choices
Commands and Requests
Comparisons
Comparing b
Contrast
Conditions
Deciding
Degree
Experiences recollect
Hypothetical
Intentions and Plans
Certainity and Uncertainity
Possibility
Recollect
Regret
Meaning
mittel
Obligation
Permission and Prohibition
Wishes
hilfsverbs
Want
Like and Dislike
Tenses
Negation
Question words
Every Some Any No
Sentence Endings
~잖아(요)-janhayo     You know As you knowI told you so
-거든요-geodeunyo   You know,Because, so
-는 구나, -는 군요 Neun guna – neun gunyo  ah now I see that  
~구나, ~군 or ~군요  :
-네(요)-ne-yo   (surprised)casual sentence ending
Ttmik 3.25
-go malgoyo   Of course
"-ㄴ/은/는데"[-n/eun/neunde] Special verb ending though”
-다니까/-라니까 (-danikka / ranikka) I said/I told you
-ㄹ/을까 말까 (eulkka malkka)   -kka malkka weather to A or not
-(eu) l geoyo     Regrets guessing
-을 텐데-eul tende I am afraid that, I suppose that   It might have been s cert uncer
-(eu)ryeom   You may…
Question endings
-을까요?, -할까요?-eulkkayo?, -halkkayo? shall we, let's, why don't we
s intentions plans and possibility
eullaeyo wanna s intentions plans
-ji yoRight (assuring)
-ji(yo) -지(요) isn't it, doesn't it? Right?(question particle)
-냐-nya   casual sentence ending
-다고?, -는다고?dago?, -neundago? 요[-yo] tag question (isn't it? right?
-nayo? -나요? is it? / does it? ( question particle)
-(으)��가(요)? [-(eu)nga(yo)?]-ingayo? -인가요? tag question (isn't it? right?)
-Noun + 어때요? -Verb stem + -는 거 어때요?How about …?
-는요, 은요neunyo, eunyo How about?
-dagoyo?, -ragoyo? -다고요?, -라고요? so what you said is, so you mean
Passive
Reported Speech
Verbs irregular
iii grammar
Time
Time b
Location
Form
Color
iv grammar linking words
and
or
but
because
instead of
maybe
really
in fact
at least
anyway
a little
a lot, many
too
very
not quite
not at all
like this
always
often
sometimes
never
already
still, not yet
forever
again
among
especially
called
0 notes
korean-layout · 7 years ago
Text
Conditions
n
-(eu)na…(eu)na…Whether..or
하여튼, 여하튼, 어쨌든 amuteun anyways 어차피 eochapi do anyway
-에 따라(서)   e ttara(seo)
This structure comes from
verb 따르다 (ttareuda), which literally means "to follow." So we can literally translate -에 따라(서) (-e ttara(seo)) as "by following," and it takes the meaning of "depending on." We can drop the last letter, 서 (seo).
에 따라 [-e tta-ra] means “according to”, “in compliance with”, or “in accordance with”. 다르다 [da-reu-da] means “to be different”.
Literally, this structure means “it changes/becomes differentin accordance with” something
Formation Noun + -에 따라(서) 가격 (gagyeok) "price" 가격에 따라서 (gagyeok-e ttaraseo) 가격에 따라서 크기가 달라요. gagyeok-e ttaraseo keugi-ga dallayo. "The sizes vary depending on the price.
Sentences
상황에 따라서 달라요. sanghwhang-e ttaraseo dallayo. "It depends on the situation."
레벨에 따라서 문제가 바뀌어요. rebel-e ttaraseo munje-ga bakkwieoyo. "Depending on the level, the questions change."
.때에 따라 달라요. ttae-e ttaraseo dallayo. "It depends on the certain time.
you can leave out 서”  and it means the same.
때에 따라 달라요. [ttae-e tta-ra dal-la-yo.] = It depends on the certain time"
날씨에 따라 옷을 다르게 입어요. nalssi-e ttara os-eul dareuge ibeoyo. "I dress differently depending on the weather."
요일에 따라 달라요. yoil-e ttara dallayo. "It depends on the day of the week."
상황에 따라 달라요. [sang-hwang-e ttar-ra dal-la-yo.] = It depends on the situation.
사람에 따라 달라요. [sa-ra-me tta-ra dal-la-yo.] = It depends on the person
Depends on -에 따라 다르다 [-e tta-ra da-reu-da] or -마다 다르다 [-ma-da da-reu-da].
The verb “to depend” is literally translated to 의지하다 [ui-ji-ha-da] or 의존하다 [ui-jon-hada], but this is only when you are talking about actually being “dependent” on someone about a certain matter. So, for example, if you want to say something like, “Don’t depend on your parents”, you can use the verb 의지하다 or 의존하다 and say “부모님한테 의지하지 마세요.” But when you want to say, “it depends on the situation”, “it depends on the person”, or “it depends on how soon you finish this”, you need to use the structure에 따라 다르다 [-e tta-ra da-reu-da] or -마다 다르다 [-ma-da da-reu-da
-마다 다르다 [-ma-da da-reu-da]
마다 [-ma-da] means “every”. So 아침마다 [a-chim-ma-da] is “every morning” and 밤마다[bam-ma-da] is “every night”, and when you use -마다 with 다르다, it means “it is different for every …”.
사람마다 달라요. [sa-ram-ma-da dal-la-yo.] = For every person, it’s different. = It depends on the person.
나라마다 달라요. [na-ra-ma-da dal-la-yo.] = It depends on the country.
해마다 달라요. [hae-ma-da dal-la-yo.] = It depends on the year. = It’s different every year.
Difference between -에 따라 and -마다 These two are usually interchangeable, but -마다 can only be used with nouns, whereas -에 따라 can also be used with a clause. In order for -에 따라 to be used with a clause, however, youneed to conjugate the verb into the -는지 form.
Also, while -에 따라 has a stronger meaning of “it depends on the certain item/circumstance”, -에 마다 can also have the meaning that something constantly changes, even not really “in accordance with” the item or circumstance. For example, 해마다 달라요 can mean “it depends on that year” or “it changes every year”.
Verb stem + -는지에 따라(서) 다르다
Examples 1. 언제 가는지에 따라 달라요. [eon-je ga-neun-ji-e tta-ra dal-la-yo.] = It depends on when you go there..
2. 어디서 사는지에 따라 달라요. [eo-di-seo sa-neun-ji-e tta-ra dal-la-yo.] = It depends on where you buy it.
3. 누구한테 이야기하는지에 따라서 달라요. [nu-gu-han-te i-ya-gi-ha-neun-ji-e tta-ra-seo dal-la-yo.] = It depends on whom you talk to.
-는지에 따라 = -느냐에 따라 Sometimes you will also hear people saying -느냐에 따라 instead of -는지에 따라. They are interchangeable, but -느냐에 따라 is slightly more commonly used in spoken Korean. 달라요 vs 달라져요 You will also often hear people saying “달라져요” instead of “달라요”. This is when they want to put stress on the nuance that it “becomes” different, but usually just saying “달라요” is clear enough
You can also say -에 따라”서” 다르다 and it means the same
Difference between -에 따라 and -마다 These two are usually interchangeable, but -마다 can only be used with nouns, whereas -에 따
라 can also be used with a clause. In order for -에 따라 to be used with a clause, however, you need to conjugate the verb into the -는지 form. Also, while -에 따라 has a stronger meaning of “it depends on the certain item/circumstance”, -에 마다 can also have the meaning that something constantly changes, even not really “in accordance with” the item or circumstance. For example, 해마다 달라요 can mean “it depends on that year” or “it changes every year”.
-는지에 따라 = -느냐에 따라 Sometimes you will also hear people saying -느냐에 따라 instead of -는지에 따라. They are interchangeable, but -느냐에 따라 is slightly more commonly used in spoken Korean. 달라요 vs 달라져요 You will also often hear people saying “달라져요” instead of “달라요”. This is when they want to put stress on the nuance that it “becomes” different, but usually just saying “달라요” is clear enough.
-에 따라(서)Gi- e ddaraseo According to Depending on -에 따라(서) (-e ttara(seo)) is a structure that expresses the meaning of "depending on." This structure comes from the verb 따르다 (ttareuda), which literally means "to follow." So we can literally translate -에 따라(서) (-e ttara(seo)) as "by following," and it takes the meaning of "depending on." We can drop the last letter, 서 (seo).
With conditional “-든지Deunji   ” and “-든가deunga?
-든 (-deun)  shortened form of -든지 (-deunji), meaning "either A or B" or "whether A or B." the speaker would not mind any of those (two or more) taking place. we often repeat -든 (-든지) in Korean
Formation A NOUNS (1) 든 / 든지 is attached to nouns ending in a vowel (2) 이든 / 이든지 is attahced to nouns ending in a consonant
B (Rule) 든 말든 / 든지 말든지 is attached to Verb Stem
가든지 말든지, meaning "whether or not going";
Example Sentences 커피든 물이든 아무것이든 주세요. Keopideun mul-i-deun a-mu-geo-sideun juseyo. "Either coffee or water, please give me anything."
당신이 빵을 먹든지 말든지, 그건 내 일이 아닙니다. Dangshin-i bbangeul meokdeunji maldeunji geugeon nae ili animnida. "Whether you eat bread or not, that's not my business."
*NOTE: The usage of -던(deon) / -던지(deonji) "a past cause": It is often used with 얼마나(eolmana) "how" in a sentence. Formation: Verb (Verb Stem) + 던지 For Example: 얼마나 열심히 하던지 내가 불러도 모르던데... eolmana yeolsimhi hadeonji naega bul-leodo moreudeonde... "You worked so hard that you didn’t even hear me call you…"
Weder noch -jido -jido anta -지도 -지도 않다, can neither A nor B
-지도 -지도 않다 (-jido -jido anta) and -지도 -지도 못 하다 (-jido -jido mot hada) express negation or impossibility to choose either one of the two actions. -지 않다 (-ji anta) means "do not + action" and -지 못 하다 (-ji mot hada) means "cannot + action." Combined with -도 (do), which means "also, too," this structure means that neither of the two actions will or can be done.
Formation Verb Stem + 지도 + Verb Stem + 지도 + 안/못 하다/않다
좋아하다 (joahada) "to like"
싫어하다 (sireohada) "to hate"
좋아하지도 싫어하지도 않다 (joahajido sireohajido anta)
술 마시는 것을 좋아하지도 싫어하지도 않아요. sul masineun geos-eul joahajido sireohajido anayo. "I neither like nor hate drinking alcohol."
전화를 받다 (jeonhwa-reul batda) "to receive a phone call"
전화를 하다 (jeonhwa-reul hada) "to make a phone call"
전화를 받 + 지도 + 하 +지도 못 하다 = 전화를 받지도 하지도 못 하다 (jeonhwa-reul batjido hajido mot hada)
지금은 전화를 받지도 하지도 못 해요. jigeum-eun jeonhwa-reul batjido hajido mot haeyo. "I can neither take nor make phone calls."
Example Sentences
좋지도 나쁘지도 않아요.jochido nappeujido anayo."It's neither good nor bad."
쉽지도 어렵지도 않아요.swipjido eoryeopjido anayo."It's neither easy nor difficult."
도망가지도 숨지도 못 해요.domanggajido sumjido mot haeyo."You can neither run nor hide."
여기서는 물건을 사지도 팔지도 못 해요.yeogiseo-neun mulgeon-eul sajido paljido mot haeyo."You can neither buy nor sell things."
덥지도 춥지도 않은 날씨예요.deopjido chupjido aneun nalssi-yeyo."The weather is neither hot nor cold."
ob Wether or not -(으)ㄴ/는지
Conjugation:
(1) Action verbs - Verb stem + -는지 은지 (2) Descriptive verbs - Verb stems ending with a vowel + -ㄴ지
(The verb 이다 (to be) is included in this category as well.)
Examples
Descriptive verbs
vowel + -ㄴ지
크다 → 큰지 예쁘다 → 예쁜지
consonant + -은지
작다 → 작은지 좁다 → 좁은지
Action verbs  -는지
먹다 → 먹는지 사다 → 사는지
- When the verb stem ends with ㄹ, you drop the ㄹ and add -는지
놀다 →노는지 풀다 → 푸는지
이거 뭐예요? [i-geo mwo-ye-yo?] (= What is this?) 이거 뭔지 알아요? =Do you know what this is? 이거 뭐이다 → 이거 뭐이 + -ㄴ지 → 이거 뭐인지 → 이거 뭔지 → 이거 뭔지 알아요?
뭐가 좋아요? [mwo-ga jo-a-yo?] (= What is good?) 뭐가 좋은지 몰라요 = I don’t know what is good 뭐가 좋다 → 뭐가 좋 + -은지 → 뭐가 좋은지 → 뭐가 좋은지 몰라요
문제가 있다 [mun-je-ga it-da] (= There is a problem.) + 물어보세요. [mu-reo-bo-se-yo.]  문제가 있는지 물어보세요. 문제가 있다→ Ask (them) whether there is a problem. 문제가 있 + -는지 → 문제가 있는지 → 문제가 있는지 물어보세요.
이 사람 누구인지 아세요? [i sa-ram nu-gu-in-ji a-se-yo?] = Do you know who this person is?
이거 괜찮은지 봐 주세요. [i-geo gwaen-cha-neun-ji bwa ju-se-yo.] = See if this is okay
뭐 사고 싶은지 말해 주세요. [mwo sa-go si-peun-ji mal-hae ju-se-yo.] = Tell me what you want to buy.
내일 우리 만날 수 있는지 알고 싶어요. [nae-il man-nal su it-neun-ji al-go si-peo-yo.] = I want to know whether we can meet tomorrow or not
5. 제가 왜 걱정하는지 몰라요? [ je-ga wae geok-jeong-ha-neun-ji mol-la-yo?] = Do you not know why I worry?
그렇지 않아도geureochi anado even though, anyway
Formation is almost always used as a set phrase, and often used along with the grammatical structure -(으)려고 하다, which was means "to plan to do" or "to be about to do" something. But when "그러하다" or "그렇게 하다" needs to be replaced with a different verb to express a more specific situation, you can take the verb and add -지 않아도.
니가 말하지 않아도 도와주려고 했어. = I was going to help you even if you didn't ask me to. = 그렇지 않아도 도와주려고 했어.
Sentences
1. 안 그래도 오늘 전화하려고 했어! (an geuraedo oneul jeonhwaharyeogo haesseo!) - I was going to call you anyway.
2. 그렇지 않아도 내가 물어보려고 했어. (geureochi anado nae-ga mureoboryeogo hasseo.) - Even before you mentioned it, I was going to ask you.
3. 그렇지 않아도 나는 갈 시간이 없었어. (geureochi anado na-neun sigan-i eopseo.) - Even before that happened, I didn't have time to go anyway.
4. 안 그래도 조금 이상하다고 생각했어. (an geuraedo na-neun isanghadago saenggakhaesseo.) - Even before you mentioned that, I thought it was strange.
Notes
it literally means "even if it's not like that" or "even if you don't do it like that," it is a shortened version of the longer phrase, "그렇게 하지 않아도" or "그러하지 않아도." Literally, 그렇게 하다 means "to do like that" 그러하다 means "to be that way" or "to be like that." Therefore, this refers to whatever has happened or has been mentioned previously. Koreans use this phrase often when they were going to do something and someone mentions it or something happens so that now it's expected of them to do it.
As there are usually two ways to negate a verb in Korean, 그렇지 않다 is also interchangeable with 안 그렇다. So you can say 안 그래도 instead of 그렇지 않아도, but 안 그래도 is slightly more casual while 그렇지 않아도 can be used in all kind of polite situations.
그렇지 않아도 is often translated in English as 'anyway' at the end of a sentence, and the Korean word has the same meaning is 어차피, but just like 안 그래도, the word 어차피 is also more casual than 그렇지 않아도, so it's advsiable to say '그렇지 않아도' in polite situations.
-(으)나마나 [-(eu)na-ma-na].   Whether…or not
no matter Whether you do  or not very similar to -아/어/여 봤자
물어보나마나 안 된다고 할 거예요 [mu-reo-bo-na-ma-na an doen-da-go hal geo-ye-yo.] = Whether you ask them or not, they will certainly say no
하나마나 똑같아요. [ha-na-ma-na tto-kka-ta-yo.] = No matter whether you do it or not, the result is the same.
이야기를 하나마나 하나도 달라지는 게 없어요. [i-ya-gi-reul ha-na-ma-da ha-na-do dal-la-ji-neun ge eop-seo-yo.] = No matter whether you talk to him or not, nothing changes
이 책은 읽으나마나예요. [i cha-geun il-geu-na-ma-na-ye-yo.] = This book is worthless to read
-geodeun   When,if s hypo
-(eu)myeon  If
s hypothetical
-(eu) ryeomyeon    If you intend to
s hypo
-으면 몰라도 (-eumyeon mollado  unless
Formation V-(으)면 몰라도 (-(eu)myeon mollado) at the end of a verb stem.
Sentences 누가 도와주면 몰라도, 혼자서는 못 해요. nuga dowajumyeon mollado, honjaseo-neun mot haeyo. "I would be able to do it if someone helps me, but I can't do it alone."
내가 지금 20살이면 몰라도, 이제는 안 돼. nae-ga jigeum sumusal-imyeon mollado, ije-neun an dwae. "It wouldn't be a problem if I was twenty years old now, but now I can't do it."
너 혼자 가면 몰라도, 가족이랑 가는데 내가 왜 따라가? neo honja gamyeon mollado, gajok-irang ganeunde nae-ga wae ttaraga? "I wouldn't mind if you were to go alone, but why would I go with you if you're going with your family?"
Notes
literally means "you don't know if..." and it implies that you don't know what would happen or what it would be like if things were different. So we often use) when we are refusing something or making negative statements, although we use it for other types of statements as well. If you translate it more naturally it means, "It wouldn't be a problem if..." or "It would be different if...."
We change the copula -이다  to -(이)면 or -(이)라면 and it is followed by 몰라도. -neuni -느니 If I have to something, I would rather- When you are talking about something that you do not particularly feel like doing, or something that you would not gladly do because you think it is not the best idea to do so, you can use the structure, -느니 (-neuni). You add -느니 after what you do not want to do, and add the part saying what you would rather do after that.
a/eo ya    Only if Other ways
A/V + 아/어/여 + 야 : This pattern is equivalent to equivalent statement
Can not be used with the verb 이다 or 아니다.
한글을 먼저 알아야 한국말을 공부할 수 있어 You should know the Korean letters first so that you can study Korean. 군대를 가야 진정한 남자가 됩니다.   A man can be a real man after service in the army.
-ji anhneun han unless /i sang   unless  tt 917
This structure combines the negation form A/V + 지 않다 with 한 (‘limit’) to say “unless…”
비가 그치지 않는 한 해변에 안 가요. Unless it stops raining I’m not going to the beach.
저에게 할인을 해주지 않는 한 사지 않을 거예요. I won’t buy it unless you give me a discount.
-느냐에 달려 있다-(neu) nyae darryeo issda   It depends on
Formation
Nouns Present-(이)냐에   Past 였/이었느냐에
Descriptive Verbs Present-으냐에 Past -았/었느냐에
Action Verbs Present-느냐에 Past-았/었느냐에
while the present tense construction of the grammar point is connected directly to the verb stem, the tense is reflected in the word the grammar pattern is attached to in this instance. It is not reflected in the 있다 part of the construction.
There are two ways this grammar point can be used:
1
A는 B느냐에 달려 있다.
“A depends on B”.
When you’re using this grammar point to suggest A’s outcome is dependent on B, you would use it with words such as 얼마나 or 어떻게.
이번 일의 성공 여부는 얼마나 열심히 준비를 하느냐에 달려 있어요. The success of this task(A) depends on how hard you prepare for it(B).  
more specific.
레오: 이번 발표는 정말 잘하고 싶어요. 켄: 그거야 레오 씨가 얼마나 열심히 준비했느냐에 달려 있지요. Leo: I want to do really well on this presentation. Ken: Well that depends on how well you’ve prepared for it.
In this instance, the grammar point is used in the past tense because Leo has already done his preparing for the presentation, even though the presentation has yet to occur.
2.
A느냐 B느냐 하는 것은 C느냐에 달려 있다.
“Whether A or B happens depends on C”. A and B in this instance are often opposite actions or adjectives.
어떤 분야에서 성공하느냐 실패하느냐 하는 것은 그 사람의 타고난 능력이 아니라 그 일에 얼마나 열정을 가지고 진지하게 노력하느냐에 달려 있어요. Whether one succeeds or fails in a field depends not upon innate ability but upon how passionately and seriously one tries at it.
Failing and succeeding are opposite actions (A and B) and they depend on hard work and passion (variable C).
nouns. While it can be used with noun+이다 most often it’ll be used with just the noun itself and no copula. When this occurs, the construction changes to noun+에 달려 있다.
레오: 이번 일은 할까, 말까? 켄: 그거야 네 마음에 달려 있지. 하고 싶으면, 해! Leo: Should I do this work or not? Ken: That depends on how you feel. If you want to, do it!
레오: 내일 친구들하고 야외로 소풍을 가기로 했는데 갈 수 있을까? 켄: 그건 내일 날씨에 달려 있어. Leo: Tomorrow I’ve planned on going on a picnic with my friends; can you come? Ken: That depends on tomorrow’s weather.
Important Note: While this grammar point can be used in both writing and speech, when it is used in speaking the 느 (or 으 for adjectives) is usually dropped entirely in the present tense. So you can use 느냐에 or 으냐에 interchangeably with 냐에 for the present tense verbs/adjectives with no issues. In fact, some some textbooks seem to teach only 냐에 for adjectives so really just 마음대로 하세요.
I’ll leave this lesson off with something I think people tend to forget sometimes:
여러분, 모든 일은 어떻게 생각하느냐에 달려 있어요! -기 나름이다-gi nareum-ida It depends on…ing
to emphasize the most important factor , you use this structure and  itis often used together with the verb 하다 (hada).
Verb: 생각하다 (saenggakhada) - to think"
생각하기 나름이에요. Saenggahagi nareum ieyo"It depends on the way you think about it."
Noun 사람 (saram) - "person"
그건 사람 나름이에요. Geugeon saram nareum ieyo"That depends on the person.
1. 모든 것은 받아들이기 나름이에요. modeun geos-eun badadeul-igi nareum-ieyo. Everything depends on how you take it.
2. 그건 생각하기 나름이에요. geugeon saenggakhagi nareum-ieyo. It all depends on the way you think about it.
3. 대답하기 나름이에요. daedaphagi nareumieyo. It depends on how you answer it.
4. 문제도 문제 나름이죠. munje-do munje nareum-ijyo. It depends on what kind of problem it is
-을수록(eu)l su rogThe more…the more
예쁘다 [ye-ppeu-da] 예쁠수록 [ye-ppeul-su-rog] = the prettier it is, the more ...
비싸다 [bi-ssa-da] 비쌀수록 [bi-ssal-su-rok] = the more expensive it is, the more
학생일수록 책을 많이 읽어야 돼요. [hak-saeng-il-su-rok chae-geul ma-ni il-geo-ya dwae-yo.] = If you are a student, especially because you are a student, you need to read a lot of books.
Using -을수록 with -(으)면 Using -을수록 on its own is already enough, but sometimes people us -(으)면 and repeat the same verb in front ofthe “-을수록” part.
The more, the better. = 많으면 많을수록 좋아요.
Set expression The expression “갈수록” comes from 가다 + -을수록 and  it is used as a set phrase that means, “more and more so in time” or “as time goes by”.
갈수록 추워요. [gal-su-rok chu-wo-yo.] = It keeps getting colder.
사브린 씨는 갈수록 한국어를 잘 해요. [sa-beu-rin ssi-neun gal-su-rok han-gu-geo-reul jal hae-yo.] = Sabrin keeps getting better at her Korean.
sentences
친구는 많을수록 좋아요. [chin-gu-neun ma-neul-su-rok jo-a-yo.] = (When it comes to friends,) The more friends you have, the better. = 친구는 많으면 많을수록 좋아요.
비쌀수록 잘 팔려요. [bi-ssal-su-rok jal pal-lyeo-yo.] = The more expensive it is, the better it sells. = 비싸면 비쌀수록 잘 팔려요.
재미있는 사람일수록 좋아요. [ jae-mi-it-neun sa-ra-mil-su-rok jo-a-yo.] = The more interesting a person s/he is, the better.
재미있는 사람일수록 인기가 많아요. [ jae-mi-it-neun sa-ra-mil-su-rok in-gi-ga ma-na-yo.] = The more interesting a person s/he is, the more popular s/he is. = If you are an interesting person, it’s more likely that you are popular.
--아무리 + Verb Stem + -아/어/여도 = No matter how + verb/adverb/adjective
also in contrast
two key parts: the word 아무리 [a-mu-ri], the suffix -아/어/여도
아무리 [a-mu-ri] has a definition, but it’s rarely used on its own to define or mean anything. This word is usually used with -아/어/여도 or other endings that mean “even if” or “however”. You COULD say the same thing without 아무리, but 아무리 makes the meaning of the entire sentence much stronger and clearer.
Examples 아무리 바빠도 [a-mu-ri ba-ppa-do] = no matter how busy you are 아무리 어려워도 [a-mu-ri eo-ryeo-wo-do] = no matter how difficult it is 아무리 심심해도 [a-mu-ri sim-sim-hae-do] = no matter how bored you are
Using 아무리 with nouns
Sometimes you can use 아무리 with nouns, but in order to make them ‘verbs’, you need to add the -이다 verb.
부자 [bu-ja], “a rich person”, you need to change it to 부자이다 and the -이다 part changes to either -아/어/여도 or -(이)라도.
= 아무리 부자여도 [a-mu-ri bu-ja-yeo-do] = 아무리 부자라도 [a-mu-ri bu-ja-ra-do] No matter how rich you are = Even if you are a rich person
More examples
아무리 미인이라도 = 아무리 미인이여도 = no matter how much of a beauty she is 아무리 바보라도 = 아무리 바보여도 = no matter how big of a fool you are
Using 아무리 with other endings
You can express similar meaning with other endings. 아무리 -아/어/여도 can be replaced with 아무리 -어/어/여 봤자 (Level 7 Lesson 7), 아무리 -고 싶어도, 아무리 -려고 해도, 아무리 -(으/느) ㄴ다고 해도,etc., to express similar meanings. However, the sentences will all have subtle differences based on the core meaning of the 2nd part.
Ex) 아무리 공부해도 [a-mu-ri gong-bu-hae-do] (most neutral) = no matter how much you study
아무리 공부해 봤자 [a-mu-ri gong-bu-hae bwat-ja] (least hopeful) = no matter how much you study
아무리 공부하고 싶어도 [a-mu-ri gong-bu-ha-go si-peo-do] = no matter how much you want to study
아무리 공부하려고 해도 [a-mu-ri gong-bu-ha-ryeo-go hae-do] = no matter how much you are going to try to study
아무리 공부한다고 해도 [a-mu-ri gong-bu-han-da-go hae-do] (less hopeful) = no matter howmuch you study
아무리 + Verb Stem + -아/어/여도 그렇지...
In addition to the basic structure of -아/어/여도, there is also a commonly used structure, - 아/어/여도 그렇지, that is used with 아무리. When you add “그렇지”, the sentence can be used on its own, without the next part following. Here, 그렇지 means “but still...”. Ex) 아무리 어려워도 = no matter how difficult it is, 아무리 어려워도 그렇지. = I know it’s difficult, but still... / No matter how difficult it is, still..
2. 아무리 싫어도, 안 싫은 척 해 주세요. [a-mu-ri si-reo-do, an si-reun cheok hae ju-se-yo.] = No matter how much you hate him, please pretend you don’t hate him
4. 아무리 비싸도 제가 사 줄게요 [a-mu-ri bi-ssa-do je-ga sa jul-ge-yo.] = No matter how expensive it is, I’ll buy it for you
As long as
There are a few ways to say this in Korean. 1. Verb stem + -기만 하면 (Original literal translation = “if + S + only + V”) 2. Verb stem + -(느)ㄴ 한 (Original literal translation = “within the boundaries where S + V”) 3. Verb stem + -지만 않으면 (Original literal translation = “only if + S + doesn’t + V”)
Examples 1. Verb stem + -기만 하면 여기에 있기만 하면 괜찮아요. [yeo-gi-e it-gi-man ha-myeon gwaen-cha-na-yo.] = As long you are here, you’re fine.
2. Verb stem + -(느)ㄴ 한 ** This form is a little more formal than the other forms. 제가 열쇠를 가지고 있는 한, 아무도 못 들어가요. [ je-ga yeol-soe-reul ga-ji-go it-neun han, a-mu-do mot deu-reo-ga-yo.] = As long as I have the keys, no one can go in.
3. Verb stem + -지만 않으면 (Original literal translation = “only if + S + doesn’t + V”) 너무 춥지만 않으면 갈게요. [neo-mu chup-ji-man a-neu-myeon gal-ge-yo.] = As long as it’s not too cold, I will go/come. Once unless -(으/느)ㄴ 이상 can be used in both the present tense and in the past tense, but with the present tense, it is used more often in writing than when speaking. Example 저도 이 회사의 직원인 이상, 이 행사에 꼭 참여해야 돼요. = Since I’m also an employee of this company, I must participate in this event. Therefore, especially in spoken language, the structure -(으/느)ㄴ 이상 is used more commonly in the past tense than in the present tense. When used in the past tense, it can be translated to “since you have already done this, this is bound to happen” or “you have done this, so this has to be the way things are”. 2. 한번 시작한 이상, 중간에 포기할 수 없어요. = Once you’ve started, you can’t quit in the middle.
Negative Forms When -(으/느)ㄴ 이상 is used in a negative form, the sentence can take the meaning of “as long as” or “unless”, and the following clause usually describes a negative situation or is a negative statement. (1) Negative form + -(으/느)ㄴ 이상 As there are various ways to form a negative sentence in Korean, this structure also works with various forms of negative verb endings. Sample Sentences 1. 비행기를 타지 않는 이상, 그렇게 빨리 갈 수가 없어요. = Unless you take the airplane, you can’t go that fast.
(2) Noun + -이/가 아닌 이상 With nouns, since you need to add the verb -이다 before you can conjugate it, you add the structure -이/가 아닌 이상 after the noun. Sample Sentences 1. 여기 직원이 아닌 이상, 들어갈 수가 없어요. = Unless you’re a staff member here, you can’t go in. 2. 가족이 아닌 이상, 그런 건 알 수가 없어요. = Unless you are his family, it’s impossible to know such things. Verb stem + -는 한이 있더라도 + … = Even if I end up + … -ing ... = Even if that means I have to ...
Here, the word 한 means “case” or “situation”, so the literal translation of this structure is “even if there is a situation where ABC happens, I will do XYZ”. The phrase that follows is usually about something that one is determined to do, can’t do, or has to do. When -는 한이 있더라 도 is used in a sentence, that sentence usually ends with -수 없어요 (can’t do), -아/어/여야 돼요 (have to), or -(으)ㄹ 거예요 (will). Examples 1. 나중에 후회하는 한이 있더라도 = Even if that means we will regret it later - 나중에 = later - 후회하다 = to regret
3. 회사를 그만두는 한이 있더라도 할 말은 해야겠어요. = Even if I end up quitting the job because of this, I have to say what I have to say -치고는 chigoneun   considering " or "for...
Formation Noun + 치고는 Verb + -(으)ㄴ/는 것 치고는
examples
noun . 노트북 컴퓨터 치고는 무겁네요. = "This is heavy, for a laptop computer."
Verbs
늦게 출발한 것 치고는 일찍 도착했어요. "Considering that we left very late, we arrived early."
싼 것 치고는 품질이 좋아요. "For being cheap, it has good quality."
Sentences
걔는 중학생 치고는 키가 너무 커요. gyae-neun jung-haksaeng chigoneun ki-ga neomu keoyo. He's really tall for a middle school student.
혼자 사는 사람 치고는 방이 넓네요. honja saneun saram chigoneun bang-i neolpneyo. For someone who lives alone, you have a very big room.
여름 치고는 안 더운 것 같아요. yeoreum chigoneun an deo-un geot gatayo. Considering that it's summer, I don't think it's very hot.
직장인 치고는 공부를 열심히 하시는 것 같아요. jikjang-in chigoneun gongbu-reul yeolsimhi hasineun geot gatayo. I think you study hard, for someone who's working in a company.
50살 치고는 순발력이 좋으세요. osipsal chigoneun sunballyeok-i joeuseyo. For being fifty years old, you have very good reflexe
1 note · View note
korean-layout · 7 years ago
Text
Hypothetical
n
그러면/그렇다면
By adding ~(으)면 to 그렇다 you can create “그러면.” By adding ~ㄴ/는다면 to 그렇다 you can create “그렇다면” (Remember that 그렇다 is an adjective and therefore 그렇는다면 would be incorrect)
When some situation is being talked about, you can use “그러면/그렇다면” to say “If (that situation)…”. The common translation of these two is simply “if so.” For example:
내일 비가 올 것 같아요 = It will probably rain tomorrow 그러면/그렇다면 공원에 안 갈 거예요 = If so, I’m not going to the park
If not: 아니면
아니다 and how it can be used to mean “to not be.” By combining 아니다 with ~면, we get “아니면” which literally means “if not.” We can often see 아니면 used at the beginning of a sentence referring to the previous sentence. For example:
진정하세요! 아니면 제가 교장선생님을 부를 거예요 = Calm down. If not, I will call the principal /or I will call the principal
-(으)면[-(eu)myeon]-if
if 1.만일, 만약 [man-yak] = in case, if       to indicate an advance signal of if 2. -(으)면 [-(eu)myeon] = verb ending for “if”
is equivalent to 'if' or 'when' in English.
Formation
Present-(으)면 Past~았/었으면    would have~았/었/을 것이다 Future ,eu,l geo myeon
consonant + -으면
좋다[jota]: "to be good" 좋으면[jo-eumyeon]: "if it's good" 이거 좋으면, 가져갈래요. [Igeo joeumyeon gajjyeogallaeyo]If this is good, I am going to take it.
vowel + -면
사 다 [sa-da] = to buy 사면[sa-myeon] if I buy it 샀으면 [sa-sseu-myeon] = if i bought it
보다 [bo-da]  to watch 보면 [bo-myeon] =  if I watch 봤으면 [bwa-sseu-myeon] =  if I watched it 볼 거면 [bol geo-myeon] = if you are going to watch itsada]:
Sentences
니가 안 가면 나도 안 갈 거야. Ni-ga an gamyeon na-do an gal geo-ya If you are not going there, I am not going there, either.
만약 내가 가면 넌 어떻게 할거야? [Manyak nae-ga gamyeon neon otteoke hal geoya?] If I leave you, what are you going to do?
빨리 준비하지 않으면 나 혼자 갈 거야. Ppalli junbihaji aneumyeon, na honja gal geo-ya If you don't get ready quickly, I'm going to go there by myself.
고장나면 나한테 말해. Gojangnamyeon na-hante malhae. If it's broken, tell me.
그것이 너무 비싸면, 이것은 어때요? Geugeos-i neomu bissamyeon, igeos-eun eottaeyo? : If that one is too expensive, how about this one?
만약 내가 전화 안 하면, 먼저 밥 먹어. Manyak nae-ga jeonhwa an hamyeon, meonjeo bap meogeo. If I don't call you, go ahead and eat first.
리모콘을 찾으면, TV를 볼 수 있어요. [rimoko-neul chajeu-myeon, tivi-reul bol su isseo-yo.] If you find the remote control, you can watch TV
만약 [man-yak] 만약 내가 공부했으면 시험을 합격했을 것이다 = If I studied, I would have passed the test 만약 내일 비바람이 오면 경기가 취소될 거예요 = If it storms tomorrow, the match/game will be cancelled 만약 지금 환경을 보존하지 않으면 미래에 더 큰 문제가 생길 것 같아요 = If we don’t preserve the environment now, there will probably be bigger problems in the future
Usage 1 To indicate that one action occurs “when/if” another action (that hasn’t happened yet) occurs
집에 도착하면 빨래를 할 거예요 = When I arrive at home, I will do laundry
집에 일찍 도착하면 빨래를 할 거예요 = If I arrive home early, I will do laundry
학교에 가면 알려 주세요 = When/if you go to school, let me know
호를 보면 저에게 말을 바로 해 주세요 = When/if you see the signal, let me know immediately please 내일 비바람이 오면 경기가 취소될 거예요 = If it storms tomorrow, the match/game will be cancelled
지금 환경을 보존하지 않으면 미래에 더 큰 문제가 생길 것 같아요 = If we don’t preserve the environment, there will probably be bigger problems in the future
오늘 그 사람을 만나면 낯선 사람으로 대할 거예요 = If I meet that person today, I’m going to treat him like a stranger
진정하지 않으면 콜라를 주지 않을 거예요 = If you don’t calm down, I won’t give you a cola
신랑이 신부를 보면 그녀가 얼마나 예쁜지 깨달을 거예요 = The groom will realize how pretty the bride is when he sees her
naeil bi omyeon jibe isseul geoyeyo if it rains tomorrow i will be at home
igeo da samyeon eolmayeyo  if i buy all this how much will it cost bulpyeonhamyeon malhae juseyo  if its inconvenient please tell me
내가 공부했으면… = If I studied… 내가 먹었으면… = If I ate… 내가 갔으면… = If I went…
Expressing this meaning of “would have” in Korean is done by adding ~았/었/을 것이다 to the final word of the sentence. For example
내가 공부���으면 시험을 합격했을 것이다 = If I studied, I would have passed the test
돈을 다 쓰지 않았으면 그것을 샀을 거예요 = If I didn’t/hadn’t spent all of my money, I would have bought that
그 남자가 너무 수상하지 않았으면 그를 믿었을 거예요 = If that man weren’t so suspicious, I would have believed him
Usage 2 To generally indicate that when one action occurs, another action occurs
비가 오면 날씨가 추워져요 = When/if it rains, the weather gets colder
누구나 자기 전 여자 친구를 만나면 분위기가 어색해요 = When/if anybody meets their ex-girlfriend, the atmosphere is awkward
Usage 3 To indicate that an action occurs whenever another action is repeated
그 연예인이 방에 들어가면 양쪽에서 사람들이 그에게 다가가요 = Whenever that celebrity goes into a room, people approach him from both/all directions
아버지가 운전하면 습관으로 담배를 피워요 = Whenever my dad drives, he smokes cigarettes out of habit
일요일이면 그 가족이 기도하러 교회에 가요 = Whenever it is Sunday, that family goes to church to pray
irregulars with eumyeon
Below is a table showing the changes that result from adding ~(으)면 to a word
rregular Word + ~(으)면 ㅅ Irregular    짓다 (to build) 지으면 ㄷ Irregular걷다 (to walk) 걸으면 ㅂ Irregular돕다 (to help) 도우면 ㅡ Irregular잠그다 (to lock) 잠그면 르 Irregular자르다 (to cut) 자르면 ㄹIrregular살다 (to live) 살면 ㅎ Irregular그렇다 (to be like that) 그러면
ou will see these same changes to irregulars anytime you add something that begins in ~(으)ㅁ…. For example
~(으)면서 ~(으)며 ~(으)므로
-ㄴ/는다면- neun/n damyeon  if /(in case ) ( probability is lower )
is a Contraction of n/neun dago hamyeon if we were to say that... When used like this, there is a little bit more of an emphasis of the fact that the action is a supposition/assumption than when ~(으)면 is used. Therefore, the translation of “if” (manyag) or hogsi is more commonly used with ~ㄴ/는다면.: The words need to be conjugated using the plain/diary form before ~면 can be added on.
It is common to end these “assumption” sentences with ~ㄹ/을 텐데
neoreul dasi manandamyeon if i could meet you again…
Vergleich mit eu myeon:
Gati gago sipeumyeon malhae if you want to go together tell me (manyag) Gati gago sipdamyeon malhae  if in case you want to go together tell me
himdeulmyeon malhae if its difficult tell me (hogsi )himdeuldamyeon malhae  if is difficult for you tell me
geu saram mannamyeon jeonhoahae if you meet that person call me geu saram mannandamyeon mueo rago malhal geoyeyo  if you meet that person what will you say
Formation again adjective -dago hamyeon  cont damyeon verb n/neun dago hamyeon  cont n/neun damyeon
noun  (i)rago hamyeon cont (i)ramyeon
내가 새라면 너에게 날아갈텐데 naega manyag sae ramyeon neo-ege nara gal tende if i were a bird i would fly to you (from a korean poem)
ige da ggum-iramyeon...if all this was a dream….
For example:
For verbs in the present tense: 가다 = 간다면 먹다 = 먹는다면
For adjectives in the present tense: 행복하다 = 행복하다면 길다 = 길다면
For verbs in the past tense: 가다 = 갔다면 먹다 = 먹었다면
For adjectives in the past tense: 행복하다 = 행복했다면 길다 = 길었다면
For 이다 and 아니다 이다 = 이라면 (present tense) 이다 = 이었다면 (past tense) 아니라면 (present tense) 아니었다면 (past tense)
All of the examples shown to this point expressed using ~ㄴ/는다면.
집에 도착한다면 빨래를 할 거예요 집에 일찍 도착한다면 빨래를 할 거예요 학교에 간다면 알려 주세요 신호를 본다면 저에게 말을 바로 해 주세요 과학자가 된다면 피부에 습도의 영향을 연구하고 싶어요 내일 비바람이 온다면 경기가 취소될 거예요 지금 환경을 보존하지 않는다면 미래에 더 큰 문제가 생길 것 같아요 오늘 그 사람을 만난다면 낯선 사람으로 대할 거예요 손님이 온다면 맛있는 음식을 대접할 거예요 진정하지 않는다면 콜라를 주지 않을 거예요 내일 아침에 이슬이 있는다면 고추가 다 죽어 버릴 거예요 내일 분위기가 어색하다면 이 게임을 한 번 해 보세요 신랑이 신부를 본다면 그녀가 얼마나 예쁜지 깨달을 거예요 내가 공부했다면 시험을 합격했을 것이다 내가 밥을 먹었다면 배고프지 않았을 것이다 친구를 만났다면 재미있었을 것이다 돈을 다 쓰지 않았다면 그것을 샀을 거예요 내가 사과를 다 안 먹었다면 너에게 한 개를 줬을 거야 햇살이 그렇게 강하지 않았다면 밖에 나갔을 거예요 음식이 충분했다면 사람들에게 균등하게 줬을 거예요 그 남자가 너무 수상하지 않았다면 그를 믿었을 거예요 고추를 안 넣었다면 맵지 않았을 거예요
————————–
It is also possible to attach ~았/었더라면 to the tenses above in the past tense, for example:
내가 공부했더라면 시험을 합격했을 것이다 내가 밥을 먹었더라면 배고프지 않았을 것이다 친구를 만났더라면 재미있었을 것이다 돈을 다 쓰지 않았더라면 그것을 샀을 거예요 내가 사과를 다 안 먹었더라면 너에게 한 개를 줬을 거야 햇살이 그렇게 강하지 않았더라면 밖에 나갔을 거예요 음식이 충분했더라면 사람들에게 균등하게 줬을 거예요 그 남자가 너무 수상하지 않았더라면 그를 믿었을 거예요 고추를 안 넣었더라면 맵지 않았을 거예요
Formation again adjective -dago hamyeon  cont damyeon verb n/neun dago hamyeon  cont n/neun damyeon noun  (i)rago hamyeon cont (i)ramyeon
This concept in reported speech
-verb (eu)rago hamyeon (eu)ramyeon imperative
nagaramyeon eohdeoghe haljyo if they tell me to go,to leave what should i do
other form of contraction in reported speech
-go hada an doida  cant be
shortened with -n dago
andoindago malhaeyo they say its not possible
shortened
andoindaeyo  they say its not possible
-(으)려면-(eu)ryeomyeon "If one is going to do..." or "if one intends to do...". to do something
Formation
Verb(으)려면-(eu)ryeomyeon
The part
하다 hada : to do 하려면 haryeomyeon"If you are going to do...""
서울역에 가려면 어떻게 가야 돼요? seo-ul-yeok-e garyeomyeon eotteoke gaya dwaeyo? "If I want to go to Seoul Station, how should I get there?"
컴퓨터를 사려면 어디에 가야 돼요? keompyuteo-reul saryeomyeon eodi-e gaya dwaeyo? "Where should I go if I want to buy a computer?"
이거 고치려면 누구한테 말해야 돼요? igeo gochiryeomyeon nuguhante malhaeya dwaeyo? "If I want to fix this, whom should I talk to?"
이거 사려면 돈이 얼마 들어요? igeo saryeomyeon don-i eolma deureoyo? "If I want to buy this, how much money does it cost?"
여행 가려면 아르바이트를 해야 돼요. yeohaeng garyeomyeon areubaiteu-reul haeya dwaeyo. "To go on a trip, I have to do a lot of part-time jobs."
Notes
-(으)려 expresses intention or plan and -면 expresses a condition, so together, ...(으)려면 means "if  you are going to" or "if one intends to do...". Therefore, we mostly use this structure along with expressions regarding plans or intentions.
When making sentences, most of the time you can replace ~(으)려면 with ~고 싶으면. For example:
대학교에 가려면 수능을 잘 봐야 돼요 = If you want to be able to go to University, you should do well on 수능 대학교에 가고 싶으면 수능을 잘 봐야 돼요 = If you want to go to university, you should do well on 수능
의사가 되려면 공부를 많이 해야 돼요 = If you want to be able to be a doctor, you should study a lot 의사가 되고 싶으면 공부를 많이 해야 돼요 = if you want to be a doctor, you should study a lot
The subtle difference that exists between ~(으)려면 and ~고 싶으면 is that the ~려 in ‘~(으)려면’ signifies that the desired action requires a certain amount of effort to be completed. For example, where this sentence makes sense:
As you have seen, when ~(으)려면 is used, it is usually followed by a clause ending with ~아/어야 하다. Other typical endings are ~이/가 필요하다 or an imperative ending like ~세요 or 아/어라.
More examples:
그렇게 비싼 것을 사려면 돈이 많이 필요해요 = If you want to be able to buy that, you need a lot of money 서울에 가려면 지하철을 타! = If you want to be able to go to Seoul (if you want to go to Seoul/if you intend to go to Seoul), then take the subway! 서울에 가려면 어디로 가야 돼요? = If I want to go to Seoul, which way should I go? 주소를 바꾸려면 직접 와야 돼요 = If you want to be able to change your address, you must come in person (if you intend to change your address, you should come in person) ~거든.-geodeun  if
can be placed between two clauses to have the meaning of “if” or “when” similar to ~(으)면 or ~ㄴ/는다면 difference is that ~거든 is more usually used when the second clause ends with an imperative conjugation (when somebody tells somebody to do something) or some other form of suggestive ending
However, this usage is not very common
바지가 너무 크면 교환해! = If the pants are too big, change them! 바지가 너무 크거든 교환해! = If the pants are too big, change them!
숙제를 다 하거든 알려줘! = Let me know when you are done your homework! 숙제를 다 하면 알려 줘! = Let me know when you are done your homework!
If you are studying for the intermediate TOPIK test, be prepared to answer a question like the following:
Choose the grammatical principle that can replace the underlined section in the following sentence:
길이 미끄러우면 버스를 타!
a) 미끄러운데 b) 미끄럽잖아 c) 미끄럽다가 d) 미끄럽거든
even if
-a eo do   even though even if  
s contrast
-더라도-deorado Even if
When used in the present tense, this principle can be contrasted with ~ㄴ/는다면 (if)
공부를 한다면 시험을 잘 볼 거예요 = If I study, I will do well on the test
The most natural way to use ~더라도 is in situations where the condition is the same as something that happened in a clause with “if”, but the opposite occurs in the second clause.
공부를 하더라도 시험을 잘 못 볼 거예요 = Even if I study, I will do poorly on the test
날씨가 좋다면 밖에 나갈 거예요 = If the weather is nice, I am going to go outside 날씨가 좋더라도 밖에 안 나갈 거예요 = Even if the weather is nice, I am not going outside
I feel it is a good exercise to compare/contrast these ~ㄴ/는다면 and ~더라도 sentences, just to give you an idea of how they can work. Contrasting ~ㄴ/는다면 with ~더라도 like this sometimes works. However, sometimes the result is non-sense. For example, if I made this sentence using ~ㄴ/는다면:
술집에 간다면 술을 마실 거예요 = If I go to the bar, I am going to drink alcohol Using ~더라도, and a clause with the opposite meaning of the sentence above, I could make: 술집에 가더라도 술을 안 마실 거예요 = Even if I go to the bar, I am not going to drink
Both of those sentences make sense. However, if I switched the second clauses of each sentence:
술집에 간다면 술을 마실 거예요 = If I go to the bar, I am going to drink This sentence would make sense – both grammatically and logically. However, if we wanted to contrast that type of sentence with “~더라도”, and use a clause with the opposite meaning, we would have: 술집에 가더라도 술을 마실 거예요 = Even if I go to the bar, I am going to drink
Grammatically this sentence would be okay, but logically it doesn’t make sense.
Notice that in some cases, “even if” could be substituted with “even though” without a major difference in meaning. If you look at the second pair of examples above, we could also say:
날씨가 좋지만 밖에 안 나갈 거예요 = Even though the weather is nice, I am not going outside
Some sources on the internet will tell you that “더라도” can be translated to “even though.” However, this is not always the case, and I strongly suggest translating “더라도” to “even if” and not “even though.” For example, if we replace “~더라도” with “~지만” in the first pair of sentences above, we get:
공부를 하지만 시험을 잘 못 볼 거예요 = Even though I study, I will do poorly on the test… which sounds unnatural
The meaning and usage of “더라도” is most easily understood if you simply submit to the fact that it means “even if.”
그 여자가 오더라도 그녀랑 얘기를 안 할 거예요 = Even if that girl comes, I’m not going to talk to her 시험을 잘 보더라도 입학하지 못 할 것 같아요 = Even if I do well on the exam, I won’t be able to get into University 차로 가더라도 이미 늦었어요 = Even if we go by car, we are already late 날씨가 춥더라도 꼭 오세요 = Even if it is cold, make sure that you come
past tense,
the second clause is usually conjugated using the  ~았/었을 것이다 ending,
1) 열심히 공부를 했더라도 시험에 떨어졌을 거예요 = Even if I studied really hard for the exam, I would have failed
Contrasted with ~ㄴ/는다면: 열심히 공부를 했다면 시험을 잘 봤을 거예요 = If I studied really hard for the exam, I would have done well And to show you that ~더라도 does not mean “even though”: 열심히 공부를 했지만 시험에 떨어졌을 거예요 (Even though I studied really hard for the exam, I would have failed) – sounds weird.
2) 돈이 있었더라도 그 컴퓨터를 사지 않았을 거예요 = Even if I had money, I wouldn’t have bought that computer
Contrasted with ~ㄴ/는다면 돈이 있었다면 그 컴퓨터를 샀을 거예요 = If I had money, I would have bought that computer And to show you that ~더라도 does not mean “even though” 돈이 있었지만 그 컴퓨터를 사지 않았을 거예요 (Even though I had money, I wouldn’t have bought that computer) – sounds weird
summarize it all in a couple sentences:
~더라도 is best translated to “even if” When you place sentences that contain ~더라도 and ~ㄴ/는다면 beside each other, you can see how they can have opposite, contrasting meanings You should avoid using “even though” as a translation of ~더라도
I saw a post circulating claiming that these two grammar points are interchangeable, and I’d just like to take a second to say: no, they’re not.
-는데도 can be thought of as a the abbreviated version of -는데 그래도.  With this in mind, we know that the result in the second clause following -는데도 is contrary to what we would expect based on the information in the first clause.
나는 주연 씨를 매일 만나는데도 친하지 않아요.  I meet Ju-yeon every day, but we’re not close.  (Even though I meet Ju-yeon every day, we’re not close.)
From the first clause, you know that I meet Ju-yeon every day, and following that, the logical assumption is that we’re close.  However (this is where 그래도 kicks in), the truth is that we’re not close at all.  The information in the first clause has no bearing on that in the second.
방을 하루종일 청소했는데도 아직 더러워요.  I cleaned my room all day, but it’s still dirty. (Even though I cleaned my room all day, it’s still dirty)
열심히 공부했는데도 시험에 떨어졌어요. I studied hard, but I failed the test.  (Even though I studied hard, I failed my test.)
-더라도 is similar in that the information in the first clause has no effect on the information in the second clause.  However, with -더라도 we are working with a hypothetical scenario.
방을 하루종일 청소하더라도 더러울 거예요.  Even if I (were to) clean my room all day, it’ll be dirty.
열심히 공부하더라도 시험에 떨어질 거예요.  Even if I (were to) study hard, I’ll still fail the test.
When used in the past tense, -더라도 has a feeling of inevitability when it comes to the final outcome: regardless of whatever past action taken, the result would remain unchanged.
방을 할루종일 청소했더라도 아직 더러웠을 거예요. Even if I had cleaned my room all day, my room still would’ve been dirty.
열심히 공부했더라도 시험에 떨어졌을 거예요. Even if I had studied hard, I would’ve (still) failed the test.
Again, we can see that the information in the first clause of the sentence has no influence over the result in the second clause of the sentence.
The difference between the two grammar points can be summed up thusly: -는데도 can be translated as “Even though”; -더라도 as “Even if”.
-(eu)ndeul  Even if, granted that…
This form can be used with action verbs, descriptive verbs, and nouns alike in the past and present tenses!
Nouns
PRESENT: -인들 / -(이)라(고) 한들 PAST: -이었/였다(고) 한들 PAST RETROSPECTIVE: -이었/였던들
Descriptive Verbs
PRESENT: -(으)ㄴ들 / -다(고) 한들 PAST: -이었/였다(고) 한들 PAST RETROSPECTIVE:-았/었던들
Action Verbs
present tense  ㄴ/ -은들  / -ㄴ/는다고 한들 past tense -았/었다(고) 한들 past retrospective-았/었던들
you can conjugate the verb to the past tense and add the retrospective -더 before adding -ㄴ들. When used in this manner, there is sometimes (but not always!) a sense of reflecting on a past situation in a regretful or desirous way.
This grammar can also appear in the form -ㄴ/는다(고) 한들.
Nouns: PRESENT: -인들 / -(이)라(고) 한들
준호 씨가 아무리 부지런한 사람인들 (사람이라 한들) 2주일 치 일을 1주일 만에 하지는 못할 거예요.(No matter how diligent a person Junho is, he won’t be able to finish two weeks’ work within a week.)
아무리 예쁜 원피스인들 (원피스라 한들) 한두 번만 입을 옷에 그렇게 큰 돈을 쓸 수 있는 사람은 많지 않아요. (No matter how pretty the dress is, there aren’t many people who can spend that much money on something they will wear only once or twice
PAST: -이었/였다(고) 한들
그날 소개팅으로 만난 남자가 세상에서 가장 멋있는 남자였다 한들 성격이 너무 안 좋아서 계속 만나지는 않았을 거예요.(Even if the man I met on a b- date that day was the coolest guy on earth, his personality was so bad that I wouldn’t have continued meeting him.)
오래된 빌딩이 아니었다고 한들 주변에 거의 아무 것도 없어서 거기서 살고 싶어하는 사람은 거의 없었을 거예요. (Even if it was not an old building, there was nothing nearby so nobody would have wanted to live there.)
PAST RETROSPECTIVE: -이었/였던들
제가 좀 더 부지런한 사람이었던들 대회 신청 기한을 놓치지 않았을 거예요. (If I had been a more diligent person, I wouldn’t have missed the contest application deadline.)
제가 학교를 다닐 때 게으른 사람이었던들 공부를 할 땐 열심히 했어요. (Even though I was lazy when I was in school, I studied hard.)
Descriptive verbs: PRESENT: -(으)ㄴ들 / -다(고) 한들
윤서 씨가 아무리 예쁜들 (예쁘다 한들) 계속 남들 뒷담화를 하면 누가 윤서 씨랑 친해지고 싶겠어요? (No matter how pretty Yoonseo is, if she keeps talking about others behind their backs who will want to be close with her?)
가격이 많이 저렴한들 (저렴하다 한들) 이렇게 품질이 안 좋은 걸 사는 사람은 거의 없을 것 같아요. (Even if the price is really cheap it seems like there would be hardly anyone buying something of such poor quality.)
PAST: -았/었다(고) 한들
제 이력서가 뛰어났다 한들 사장님은 아들을 고용하고 싶어해서 제가 고용될 가망이 없었어요. (Even though my resume was outstanding, the boss wanted to hire his son so I had no chance of getting hired.)
PAST RETROSPECTIVE: -았/었던들
어렸을 때 더 외향적이었든들 대학교 때 친구를 더 쉽게 사귈 순 없었을 거예요. (Even if I had been more extroverted when I was younger, I would not have been able to make friends more easily at university.)
성적이 좀 더 좋았던들 더 좋은 대학교를 다닐 수 있었을 텐데… (If my grades had been better I would have been able to attend a better university…)
Action verbs:
PRESENT: -(으)ㄴ들 / -ㄴ/는다고 한들
돈을 10년 동안 열심히 모아 둔들 (모아 둔다고 한들) 그렇게 비싼 차를 살 수 없어요.  (Even if I save money for ten years, I couldn’t buy such an expensive car.)
공부를 아예 안 한들 (한다고 한들) 시험에 합격할 수 있다고 생각해요? (Even if you don’t study at all, do you think you can pass the the exam?)
PAST: -았/었다(고) 한들
제가 아무리 많이 컸다 한들 제게 아기 때 붙여주신 애칭을 쓰시는 할머니께서 저를 어른 대접 해주시는 건 불가능한 것 같아요. (No matter how much I’ve grown, it seems impossible for my grandmother, who still uses my baby pet name, to treat me as an adult.)
PAST RETROSPECTIVE: -았/었던들
파티에서 좀 더 일찍 나갔던들 그렇게 많이 마시지 않았을 테고 지갑도 잃어버리지 않았을 거예요… (If I had left the party a bit earlier, I wouldn’t have drank so much and I wouldn’t have lost my wallet…)
그 친구를 좀 더 소중하게 여겼던들 계속 친하게 지낼 수 있었을까? (Even if I had not taken that friend for granted, would we still be close?) [LIT- If I had considered that friend a bit more preciously…])
그 친구를 좀 더 소중하게 여겼던들 어차피 내가 이사 가버릴 거라서 별로 친하게 지내지도 못 했을 것이다. (Even if I had not taken that friend for granted, I would have moved away anyway so we wouldn’t have been able to be that close.) [NOTE: We can feel little/no sense of regret, but there is some reflection and the content of the preceding clause has little/no impact on the outcome in the following clause]
-(eu)l  mangjeong  Even if..may. s contrast
~기에 망정이지-gi mangjeongiji   it was good that...otherwise  tumblr
in this case it is a dependent noun (의존명사). It follows “~기에”, “~니(까)”, or “~어서” to signify that the preceding phrase was a good thing or a relief, and is followed by an explanation of what would have happened if the first clause had not occurred. So it can be understood as similar to saying “… 다행이다, 그렇지 않았다면 … ”.
도와준 사람이 있었기에 망정이지 큰 일 날 뻔했어요. It was a good thing that someone was there to help, otherwise there would have been a serious problem.
천천히 차를 운전했기에 망정이지 그 식당을 못 보고 지나칠 뻔했다. Thankfully we were driving slowly, or else we would have passed the restaurant without seeing it.
-었더라면 if (I) had… (used in regrettable situation)-ass,eoss deoramyeon  If something had been the case
s regret
-V-(ㄴ/은/는) 셈치다 -neun/(eu)n semchida  Think of it as…, Consider it…, Pretend…
오늘 내가 밥 사는 것으로 지난 번에 빌린 돈을 갚은 셈 쳐요.  Let’s just say I paid you back for the money you loaned me since I paid for your meal.  (Since I paid for the meal, let’s just say we’re even.)
In the above example, I did not actually repay the money I owe.  However, by treating the person who loaned me the money to a meal, we can consider the debt between us repaid.
선물을 받은 셈 칠 테니까 가지고 돌아가세요. 마음만 받겠습니다.   Let’s just say I accepted your gift, so please take it back.  It’s the thought that counts.
껌 한 통에 5000원이라고 하는 할머니가 불쌍해서 기부하는 셈 치고 두 통 사 드렸다.  I felt sorry for the old woman selling gum for 5000 won a pack, so I thought of it as a donation and bought two packs.
속는 셈 치고 is an idiomatic expression using this grammar pattern meaning to give something or someone the benefit of the doubt.
친구의 말에 일리가 있었으니까 속는 셈 치고 그의 사업에 투자하기로 했다.  Because what my friend said seemed reasonable, I gave him the benefit of the doubt and decided to invest in his company
셈치다 = Suppose, assume, grant that (셈 = calculation)
그것은 잃어버린 셈치자 = Let’s suppose that we lost it. 틀릴 셈치고 물어 보다 = Hazard a guess, Ask whilst assuming you’re wrong
그냥 액땜한 셈 치세요 = Just consider this as the price you paid to avoid something much worse.
자식 하나 없는 셈 치고 살겠다 = I’m going to live as if I never had that child.
~(ㄴ/는)다고 치다 = - neun/n dago chida/gajeonghada/hada  supposedlyConsider, suppose, assume
비행기를 탄다고 쳐도 내일까지는 못 간다 = I couldn’t get there by tomorrow even if I were to supposing I went by plane. 중고차치고 이 정도면 괜찮은 편이다 = The car is all right considering that it’s used. 오늘은 겨울 날씨치고는 따뜻한 편이다 = It is quite warm today considering it’s winter.
~(으)로 치면 = judging by the standards of… if compared to… (If you consider it as…)
이게 우리나라 돈으로 치면 얼마죠? = How much would it be in our currency? 아이폰으로 치면 성능이 어느정도인건가요? = How does it perform compared to the iphone?   여기로 치면 중학교 삼학년과 고등학교 일학년 사이겠구나 = In terms of things here, that would make her between the third year of middle school and first year of high school.  
- neun/n dago haeseoSaying we suppose -다/라고 해서 just because
note: -the ‘해서’ can be removed without a change in meaning, or changed to '해도’ for emphasis
어린애라고 (해서) 우습게 보지 마라. Don’t underestimate him just because he is a young boy.
원하는 대로 되지 않은다고 화내지 마라. Don’t get angry just because things don’t  go to way you want them to.
-다/라고 해서___ -다/라는 건(의미는) 아니다. Just because- doesn’t mean ___-
내가 쉽게 상처받는다고 해서, 겁쟁이라는 건 아냐. Just because I am easily hurt doesn’t mean I’m a wuss.
단지 제조업자들이 그들의 제품이 자연산이라고 해도 안전하다는 의미는 아니다. Just because manufacturers say their products are natural doesn’t mean they are safe.
note: '단지’ (meaning 'simply’) proceeding the sentence adds emphasis.
’-다/라는 이유만으로’ is another way to say 'just because’
’-기 때문만은 아니다’ it’s not just because
~(ㄴ/은/는)다고/(이)라고/(았/었)다고 (해서) + 다/모두/꼭/항상/늘/언제나 +  _____(ㄴ/은/는) 것은 아니다 = Saying ______ doesn’t mean it’s _______)
(Used when disagreeing with a widely held belief, means the principle is not always correct or doesn’t apply in every single situation)
복관에 당첨된다고 해서 다 행복한 것은 아니래요 = Winning the lottery doesn’t guarantee happiness. 좋은 대학교에 간다고 해서 다 성공한 것은 아니에요 = Going to a good university doesn’t mean you’ll succeed in everything. 문법을 많이 안다고 해서 �� 말을 잘 하는 것은 아니다 = Knowing a lot of grammar doesn’t mean you will be able to speak well. 한국 음식이라고 해서 모두 매운 것은 아니다 = Not all Korean food is spicy.   비싼 무건이라고 해서 다 품질이 좋은 것은 아니에요 = Just because it’s expensive doesn’t mean the quality is good.
least likely
-n neun dasonchideordo
-(eu)ndeul  Even if, granted that… s oben
-n neunda haljirado
-n neunda hadeorado
-다고 해도-dago haedo even if
When you want to say "even if you do something" or "even if something happens," you can use this structure. The part -도 (-do) at the end of a verb stem has the meaning of "even if" on its own, but when combined with -다고 하다 (-dago hada), it amplifies the nuance of "even if." -다고 하다 (-dago hada) literally means "to say that...," so the entire structure, -다고 해도 (-dago haedo), means "even if you say..." or "even if they say..."
Formation [Descriptive Verb] Verb stem + -다고 해도 (-dago haedo)
[Action Verb]-ㄴ/는다고 해도
examples descriptive verb
예쁘다 예쁘다고 해도 (yeppeudago haedo) "even if you're pretty"
action verb
가다 간다고 해도 (gandago haedo) "even if you go there"
Sentences
내일 비가 온다고 해도 나는 갈 거야. naeil bi-ga ondago haedo na-neun gal geo-ya. Even if it rains tomorrow, I'll still go there.
니가 도와준다고 해도, 시간이 오래 걸릴 거야. ni-ga dowajundago haedo, sigan-i orae geollil geo-ya. Even if you were to help me, it would take a long time.
노트북 컴퓨터가 더 편리하다고 해도, 어떤 것은 너무 비싸요. noteubuk keompyuteo-ga pyeolli-hadago haedo, eotteon geos-eun neomu bissayo. Even if laptop computers are more convenient, some of them are too expensive.
아무도 안 간다고 해도, 저는 갈 거예요. amudo an gandago haedo, jeo-neun gal geo-yeyo. Even if no one is going there, I'll still go there.
비싸다고 해도 살 거예요. bissadago haedo, sal geo-yeyo. Even if it's expensive, I'm going to buy it. -ㄹ/을 뻔 하다[-l/eul ppeon hada], hal ppeon hada to almost do somethiing, to closely escape doing something
This structure is often used with the word 거의[geo-ui], "almost"  to give it more emphasis.
Almost: 거의
The word (거의) in Korean is a very common adverb, and is used very similar to how the word “almost” is used in English. I like distinguishing between usages in my head, so let’s do it right here. 거의 can be used to:
1) Show that an action is progressing and it has “almost” reached its limit. Once it reaches the limit, it will likely stop. For example:There is no way to distinguish these two in Korean without context. However, in English you could translate them differently. In English, you could translate these two to:
는 숙제를 다 했어요 = I finished all of my homework 저는 숙제를 거의 다 했어요 = I almost finished all of my homework 저는 숙제를 거의 다 했어요 = I have almost finished all of my homework
2) To show that something is just a tad off of some description. For example:
저는 화장품이 없어요 = We have no cosmetics 저는 화장품이 거의 없어요 = We almost have no cosmetics
학사 학위를 하는 것과 석사 학위를 하는 것은 똑같아요 Doing your bachelor’s degree and master’s degree is the same 학사 학위를 하는 것과 석사 학위를 하는 것은 거의 똑같아요 Doing your bachelor’s degree and master’s degree is almost same
Almost: 거의… ~ㄹ/을 뻔했다 almost
-ㄹ/을 뻔하다-(eu)l bbeonhada  
Formation Verbs stem + -ㄹ/을 뻔 하다
vowel + ㄹ 뻔 하다
떨어지다[tteoreojida]: "to fall" 떨어질 뻔하다[tteoreojil ppeonhada]: "to almost fall"
consonant + 을 뻔 하다
잊다[itda]: "to forget" 잊 + 을 뻔 하다  --> 잊을 뻔하다[izeul ppeonhada]: "to almost forget"
뻔하다 [ppeonhada] "something almost happened or came close to something" 뻔 [ppeon] is a 'dependable noun' that indicates "close", "nearly" or "almost"   하다 [hada] is a verb that means "to do" Therefore, 뻔하다 [ppeonhada] literally means "nearly do something" or "something is nearly done", which contextually means "an event / an outcome came close to something / to doing something".
저는 거의 넘어질 뻔 했어요 = I almost fell
This type of sentence describes that the action (in this case, the action of falling) never actually happened despite it “almost” happening
저는 차를 거의 칠 뻔 했어요 = I almost hit that car 화가 너무 나서 친구를 거의 때릴 뻔 했어요 = Because I was so mad, I almost punched my friend
Also note that these sentences don’t necessarily need to have the word “거의” in them. The meaning of “almost” is already embedded within the meaning of “~ㄹ/을 뻔 하다”, so it doesn’t need to be used. However, it is not uncommon to find them used together in Korean sentences.
저는 차를 칠 뻔 했어요 = I almost hit that car 우리는 1등급을 받을 뻔 했어요 = We almost received the first ranking 화가 너무 나서 친구를 때릴 뻔 했어요 = I was so mad I almost hit my friend 살인자가 사람을 죽인 동기를 말할 뻔 했어요 = The murderer almost said his motive for killing the person 우리 선생님을 모방하는 사람이 진짜 우리 선생님이라고 생각할 뻔 했다 = The person who impersonated our teacher almost made us think that he was really our teacher
Sentences
만나다 "to meet" 만날 뻔하다 "I came close to meeting [someone]"
주다 "to give" 줄 뻔하다 "I came close to giving [something]"
4. 받다 "to recieve" 받을 뻔하다 "I came close to recieving [something]"
사다 [sa-da] to buy → 살 뻔 했어요. [sal ppeon haesseo-yo.] I almost bought it.
믿다 [mit-da] = to believe → 믿을 뻔 했어요.[mi-deul ppeon hae-sseo-yo.] =  I almost believed it.
울다 [ul-da] = to cry → 울 뻔 했어요. [ul ppeon hae-sseo-yo.]  I almost cried.
무서워서 울 뻔 했어요. [museo-wo-seo ul ppeon haesseo-yo.]  It was scary so I almost cried.
돈을 잃을 뻔 했어요. [do-neul i-reul ppeon hae-sseo-yo.]  I almost lost money
갈 뻔 했는데, 안 갔어요. [ga-lppeon haet-neun-de,angasseo-yo.] I almost went there, but I didn’t go.
우리 그때 그 음식점에서 만날 뻔했는데... Uri geuddae geu eumsikjeomeseo man-nal ppeonhaetneunde... "We could have met each other at the restaurant that time..."
잘못해서 이 돈을 그 사람한테 줄 뻔했어! Jalmotaeseo i doneul geu saramhante jul ppeonhaesseo! "I almost gave him this money by mistake!"
아~~ 그때, 상을 받을 뻔 했는데... A~~ geuttae, sangeul badeul ppeon haetneunde... "Ah~~ I came close to recieving the reward…
떨어질 뻔 했어요. Tteoreojil ppeon haetseoyo. "I almost fell."
잊을 뻔 했어요. Izeul ppeon haetseoyo. "I almost forgot."
오늘 아침에 늦을 뻔 했어. Oneul achim-e neujeul ppeon haesseo. "I was almost late this morning."
5. 너무 슬퍼서 울 뻔 했어요. Neomu seulpeoseo ul ppeon haesseoyo. "I was so sad that I almost cried."
7. 놀라서 소리지를 뻔 했어요. Nolraseo sorijireul ppeon haesseoyo. "I was surprised and I almost screamed."
Related Expressions * note: 아(서) + 죽을 뻔하다 : is very often used to over-exaggerate and describe one's condition
Formation Verb Stem + -느니 가다 (gada) = "to go" 가 + 느니 = 가느니 (ganeuni) 지금 집에 가느니, 여기서 잘게요. (jigeum jib-e ganeuni yeogiseo jalgeyo.) "Rather than going home now, I will just sleep here." -느니 (neuni) is often used together with the verb ending -겠다, which expresses intention, but we can use other types of verb endings with it.
Example Sentences 1. 나중에 후회하느니, 지금 가 보고 싶어요. najung-e huhoe-haneuni, jigeum ga bogo sipeoyo. Rather than regretting it later, I want to go see it now.
2. 이걸 사느니, 차라리 지금 갖고 있는 것을 쓰겠어요. igeol saneuni, charari jigeum gatgo itneun geos-eul sseugesseoyo. If I have to buy this one, I would rather just use what I have now.
3. 혼자 영화 보러 가느니 그냥 집에서 영화 볼 거예요. honja yeonghwa boreo ganeuni geunyang jib-eseo yeonghwa bol geo-yeyo. If I have to go to the movies alone, I would rather just watch a movie at home.
만약에 -(으)면 manyage -(eu)myeon   What if-
만약에 (manyak-e) means "if" -(으)면 (-(eu)myeon) also means "if," therefore even without the word 만약에 (manyak-e), as long as the main verb is conjugated using the form -(으)면 (-(eu)myeon), the sentence keeps the same meaning. But we usually add 만약에 (manyak-e) at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize the meaning. Often, we just shorten 만약에 (manyak-e) to 만약 (manyak) as well. And when used as a question, we can translate 만약에 -(으)면 ( manyak-e -(eu)myeon) to "What if...?"
Formation 만약에 + Verb Stem + -(으)면
1. 만약에 + verb stems ending in a vowel + 면
- 가다 [gada]: "to go"  가면[gamyeon]  만약에 가면[Manyage gamyeon]: "if (you) go"
2. 만약에 + verb stems ending in a consonant + 으면
- 찾다 [chatda]: "to find"  찾으면[chajeumyeon]  만약에 찾으면[manyage chajeumyeon]: "if (you) find (it)"
Sentences
만약에 내일 비 오면? manyak-e naeil bi omyeon? "What if it rains tomorrow?"
만약에 니가 거기에 없으면? manyak-e ni-ga geogi eopseumyeon? "What if you're not there?"
만약에 우리 계획대로 안 되면? manyak-e uri gyehoekdaero an doemyeon? "What if it doesn't go as we planned?"
Notes The phrase of the lesson is 털어서 먼지 안 나는 사람은 없다 (teoreoseo meonji an naneun saram-eun eopda). 먼지 (meonji) means "dust" and 털다 (teolda) means "to shake off" or "to dust off." The entire phrase means, "There is no one who doesn't have some dust coming out when shaken off." So the phrase means that everybody has some kind of guilt and some things that they aren't very proud about. A rough English equivalent will be "Everybody has a skeleton in the closet."
We use this phrase in a variety of sentence patterns: 1. 털어서 먼지 안 나는 사람이 어디 있어요? teoreoseo meonji an naneun saram-i eodi isseoyo? "Who doesn't have some dust coming out when shaken off?" 2. 털어서 먼지 안 나는 사람 못 봤어요. teoreoseo meonji an naneun saram mot bwasseoyo. "I haven't seen anyone who doesn't have some dust coming out when shaken off." 3. 털어서 먼지 안 나는 사람도 있어? teoreoseo meonji an naneun saramdo isseo? "Is there anyone who doesn't have some dust coming out when shaken off?"
-(으)면 어떡해요?-myeon eotteokhaeyo?  what if
When you are worried about something that might or might not happen and want to say "what if...?" you can use this structure, The part 어떡해요? means "what should I do?" or "what must we do?"
어떡해요? [eotteokhaeyo?] comes from 어떻게 해요? [eotteoke haeyo?]. You can drop the 요[yo] at the end to say this in intimate language. Please note that we never use it as -(으)면 어떻게요? as a lot of people make this mistake due to the similarity in pronunciation.
Although the basic meaning of this structure is "what if someone does something" or "what if something happens," we can also use it after something has already happened as a way of accusing or blaming someone.
For Example:
지금 오면 어떡해요? jigeum omyeon eotteokaeyo? "If you get here now, what am I supposed to do?" = "You shouldn't be arriving now!"
Formation Verb stem + -(으)면 어떡해요? : What if- ?
I. "-으면 어떡해요?" is attached to the end of clauses that end in consonants.
1. 읽다[ikda]: "to read"    읽으면 어떡해요?[ilgeumyeon eotteokaeyo?]: "What if someone reads...?"
II. "-면 어떡해요?" is attached to the end of clauses that end in vowels.
2. 하다[hada]: "to do"   하면 어떡해요?[hamyeon eotteokaeyo?]: "What if someone does...?"
Sentences
아무도 안 오면 어떡해요? Amudo an omyeon eotteokaeyo? "What if nobody comes?"
너무 비싸면 어떡해요? Neomu bissamyeon eotteokaeyo? "What if it's too expensive?"
그 사람이 전화하면 어떡해요? Geu saram-i jeonhwahamyeon eotteokaeyo? "What if he calls me?"
또 늦으면 어떡해요? Tto neujeumyeon eotteokaeyo? "What if you're late again?" / "You shouldn't be late again."
지금 말해 주면 어떡해요? Jigeum malhae jumyeon eotteokaeyo? "Why are you telling me that now?"
사람들이 많이 오면 어떡해요? Saramdeul-i mani omyeon eotteokeyo? "What if a lot of people come?" -neunji -는지 whether or not -ㄴ/는지 (-n/neunji) is a grammatical structure which can be translated as "whether or not." This construction is used in contexts of gaining information, or conveying information gathered.
When used in an interrogative context, it is used to discover new information. When used in the imperative context, it is used to discover information. When used in the affirmative context, it is used to convey information gathered.
It attaches to verbs (both descriptive and action) and is typically followed cognitive verbs (알다 - to know, 모르다 -to not know), information verbs (확인하다 - to check, 조사하다 - examine, etc.), or speaking verbs (묻다 - to ask, 말 하다 - to say).
Typically this construction is applied twice to a single verb/noun and another option (which is typically the opposite). However, often, the other option is dropped, and implied.
Formation Nouns + 인지 Verb Stem + -ㄴ/는지 + [cognitive/speaking/information verb] [Conjugation differs slightly [according to the verb stem.]
3. Nouns + 인지
책[chaek]: "book" 책인지[chaeginji] + [cognitive/speaking/information verb]
Verb -ㄴ/는지
vowel + ㄴ지
바쁘다[bappeuda]: "to be busy" 바쁜지[bappeunji] + [cognitive/speaking/information verb]
consonant + 는지
괜찮다[gwenchanta]: "to be alright" 괜찮는지[gwaenchaneunji] + [cognitive/speaking/information verb]
**In this scenario 인지 is actually the copula 이다 (ida) conjugated by construction #1.
Sentences
바쁜지 안 바쁜지 알아? Bappeunji an bappeunji ara? Do you know whether (he) is busy or not?
괜찮는지 안 괜찮는지 몰라요. Gwenchanhneunji an gwenchanhneunji mollayo. I don't know whether (it) is good or not.
이거 책인지 잡지인지 알아봐. Igeo chaek-inji japji-inji arabwa. Please check whether this is a book or a magazine.
그 사람 좋은지 안 좋은지 몰라. Geu saram joeunji an joeunji molra. I don't know whether that person is good or not.
그 사람 좋으지 몰라. Geu saram joeunji molra. I don't know whether that person is good (or not).
저 아가씨한테 시간있는지 물어 보자. Jeo agassihante sigan-itneunji mureo boja. Ask that young woman whether she has some free time (or not).
이것이 스페인어인지, 불어인지 모르겠어요. Igeosi seupeineo-inji, beureo-inji moreugetseoyo. I don't know whether this is Spanish or French. Id rather -(으)ㄹ 바에
Structure Verb stem + -(으)ㄹ 바에 = Verb stem + -(으)ㄹ 바에야 = Verb stem + -(으)ㄹ 바에는
When you link two actions with -(으)ㄹ 바에, you imply that the first action or option is much worse than the second action or option, or it is so disappointing that you would rather choose the second option.
ince you are saying that the second option (the action which comes after the -(ㅇ)ㄹ 바에 part) is better, you can also add expressions related to comparisons such as the following: 1. 차라리 = would rather 2. 낫다 = to be better 3. 그냥 = just 4. -고 말다 = to just do something and be done with the matter
2. 너랑 결혼할 바에야 평생 혼자 사는 게 낫지. = If I have to marry you, it would be better living by myself forever.
Exceptions Since 바 has the meaning of “situation”, -(ㅇ)ㄹ 바에 can also imply “if you’re going to do it anyway”. In this usage, it is usually preceded by 이왕 or 어차피. Sample Sentences 1. 어차피 살 바에는 좋은 걸로 사세요. = If you are going to buy one anyway, get a good one.
-지 않으면 안 되다-ji aneumyeon an doeda must, have to, should
VERB STEM + -지 않으면 안 돼 [-ji aneumyeon an doe] "have to (= must) [verb]"
The focus of today's lesson is about 'VST + 지 않으면 안 되다(돼)' that is often used "to emphasize or stress" the need for (VERB).   This expression can be translated as "have to (VERB) or must (VERB)" which is implicit in 'duty, obligation, or responsibility, etc...'
않으면 안 되다 [aneumyeon an doeda] literally means "if you don't do it, it does NOT do/work/become", which contextually means "if you don't do it, it won't be good for you" = "you have to = must do it".
Formation 'VERB STEM' + -지 않으면 안 되다 [ji aneumyeon an doeda] "shouldn't NOT + (VERB)" = "have to/must + (VERB)" * note: 안 되다 [an doeda] = 안 돼 [an dwae] "shouldn't/can't"
VERB STEM + 지 않으면 안 되다 Becomes... Translation
충성하다 [chung-seong-hada] "to be faithful" 충성하지 않으면 안 되다 "If you are not faithful, it won't be good." = "You have to be faithful."
말(을) 듣다 [mareul deutta] "to obey" 말을 듣 + 지 않으면 안 돼 말을 듣지 않으면 안 돼 "If you do not obey (my words), it won't be good." = "You have to obey (my words)."
잘하다 [jalhada]"to treat (a person) well / to be kind to (a person)" 잘하지 않으면 안 되다 "If you do not treat (a person) well, it won't be good (for you)." = "You have to treat (a person) well."
조심하다 [josimhada]"to be careful / beware of / to watch out" 조심하지 않으면 안 돼  "If you are not careful, it won't be good." = "You must/have to be careful."
Sentences
군인은 명령에 충성하지 않으면 안 됩니다. (1. 충성하 + 지 않으면 안 되다) Gunineun myeong-ryeong-e chung-seong-haji aneumyeon an doemnida. "If soldiers do not follow orders, it won't be good. = Soldiers must follow orders."
아이들은 부모님 말씀을 듣지 않으면 안 되요... (2. 말[씀]을 듣 + 지 않으면 안 되다) Aideureun bumonim malsseumeul deujji aneumyeon an doeyo... "If children do not listen to their parents, it won't be good for them. = Children must listen to their parents."
남에게 잘하지 않으면 안 됩니다. (3. 잘하 + 지 않으면 안 되다) Namege jalhaji aneumyeon an doemnida. "If you don't treat others well, it won't be good. = You have to treat others well."
나쁜 사람들을 조심하지 않으면 안 됩니다. (4. 조심하 + 지 않으면 안 되다) Nappeun saramdeureul josimhaji aneumyeon an doemnida. "If you are not careful of bad people, it won't be good for you. = You have to watch out for bad people." -만 아니면man animyeon   "If You Weren't" / "Only If It Weren't"
너는 뭐야! 너... 과장만 아니면 내가 한 대 때렸어. "Who are you? If only you weren't my section chief, I would have given you a punch!"
When you want to suggest that you would or would have done something differently "if only" something had been in a different way, you use this grammatical structure. It comes from the verb -가 아니다 (-ga anida), which means "to not be" something, and we add it to the end of a noun to literally mean "only if it weren't + noun" or "if only it hadn't been + noun" to make the phrase conditional.
To add the nuance of "only if" to the expression, you add -만 (man), which means "only." So the entire structure becomes -만 아니면 (-man animyeon).
Formation
학생만 아니면 haksaeng-man animyeon "If only I/you weren't a student" 친구만 아니면 chinguman animyeon "If only you weren't my friend" 오늘이 내 생일만 아니면 oneul-i nae saeng-il-man animyeon "If only it weren't my birthday today"
Note: Since this is a conditional phrase, the ending part of the entire sentence is usually in the past tense or an assumption.
Sentences
학생만 아니면, 너도 초대했어. haksaeng-man animyeon, neo-do chodaehaesseo. "If only I/you weren't a student, I would have invited you, too."
친구만 아니면, 안 봤을 거야. chinguman animyeon, an bwasseul geo-ya. "If only you weren't my friend, I wouldn't have seen you again."
오늘이 내 생일만 아니면, 너한테 이런 부탁 안 했어. oneul-i nae saeng-il-man animyeon, neo-hante ireon butak an haesseo. "If only it weren't my birthday today, I wouldn't have asked you for such a favor."
no
아/어/여 봤자-eo, a boassja Though you try no use ther similar expressions are -아/어/여도 and -아/어/여 봐도, and these expressions tend to be a little more formal and less intense in nuance than -아/어/여 봤자.
How to say “it is no use” or “it won’t work” After you say -아/어/여 봤자, it’s already expected that you are going to say something along the lines of “it won’t work”, “it’s impossible” or “you can’t do it”, but in order to make it more clear, you can use the following expressions: 1. 소용 없어요. [so-yong eop-seo-yo.] = It’s of no use. It will not help. 2. 안 돼요. [an dwae-yo.] = It won’t work. It won’t do. You can’t do it. 3. 시간 낭비예요. [si-gan nang-bi-ye-yo.] = It’s a waste of time.
말해 봤자 소용 없어요. [ma-rae bwat-ja so-yong eop-seo-yo.] = Even if you talk (to them), it’ll be of no use. 가 봤자 시간 낭비예요. [ga bwat-ja si-gan nang-bi-ye-yo.] = Even if you go, it will be a waste of your time.
But quite often, you can just drop the expressions above after -아/어/여 봤자 and just add -예 요 (= to be) to make the sentence end with -아/어/여 봤자예요. This is because with just - 아/어/여 봤자 alone, the meaning is clear, and you just add -예요 to make it a complete sentence.
Ex) 해 봤자예요. [hae bwat-ja-ye-yo.] = There is no use in trying doing it. 가 봤자예요. [ga bwat-ja-ye-yo.] = There is no use in going there.
저한테 말해 봤자 소용 없어요. [ jeo-han-te ma-rae bwat-ja so-yong eop-seo-yo.] = There is no use in talking to me.
여기에 있어 봤자 시간 낭비예요. [yeo-gi-e i-sseo bwat-ja si-gan nang-bi-ye-yo.] = Even if you stay here, it’s a waste of time.
지금 출발해 봤자 시간 안에 못 가요. [ ji-geum chul-ba-rae bwat-ja si-gan a-ne mot ga-yo.] = Even if you leave now, you can’t get there in time.
-8eu8 ndeul No matter how 벌써 방학을 했는데 오늘 학교에 간들 뭣하겠어요? It’s a school holiday now, even if you went to school, what would you do
0 notes
korean-layout · 7 years ago
Text
Certainity and Uncertainity
n
ttm 4 27 hsk 35
- neun (eu)n geosida   The fact is
different from l geosida intention
Let’s remember what ~는 것 does:
If you want to just say a noun,
Person = 사람
If you want to describe that noun, you can use
adjectives: 똑똑한 사람 = smart person
Or verbs: ilg고 있는 사람 = the person who is reading
Remember that 이다 is conjugated as an adjective. Using the ~는 것 principle with 이다 is really no different than adding ~ㄴ/은 to an adjective to describe an upcoming noun. Because 이다 is conjugated as an adjective, 이다 gets conjugated as ~인
[직업이] 선생님인 사람들은 인기가 많아요 = People who[se jobs] are teachers are popular (It sounds slightly more natural to say “직업이 선생님인 사람들” in this case instead of just “선생님인 사람들.” Remember here that the entire clause before “~인” is describing the upcoming noun. In this case, the clause is “직업이 선생님이다” which would unnaturally translate to something like “the job is a teacher”. However, when put in the place of describing an upcoming noun, it can translate to “직업이 선생님인 사람들 = people whose jobs are teachers”. At any rate, try not to worry about the use of “직업” (as I realize it might be difficult) in that sentence and focus more on the big picture of what adding “~ㄴ” to 이다 accomplishes.
The thing is, as you can see with my big blurb above, this may not be as simple as it should be. Most of the time, there would be a better way – using another word or something to accomplish the same sentence. For example, in the sentence above “직업이 선생님인 사람들은 인기가 많아요”, is the meaning not exactly the same (in English) if we just say “Teachers are popular”? For example:
선생님들은 인기가 많아요 = Teachers are popular Here, we are accomplishing the same thing but don’t need to use 이다 as a descriptor in the sentence.
Another great example would be if you wanted to say something like:
“Students who are girls wear skirts”
That would translate to something like:
여자인 학생들은 치마를 입는다
But, that sentence sounds ridiculous (in both English and Korean). In Korean, it would sound much better if you just used the word “여학생”, which literally means “female students.” For example:
여학생들은 치마를 입는다 = female students wear skirts (I would much rather say “female students must wear skirts, but you haven’t learned how to do that yet, and I try not to use examples that use a concept you haven’t learned)
Despite this, there will be some times where you will find the need for using ~는 것 with 이다. Some times this happens when you come across a noun that has the feeling of an adjective. For example, the word “부자” literally means “rich person.” In English, if we wanted to say “that person is rich,” the word “rich” acts as an adjective. However, in Korean, they would say:
그 사람은 부자야 = That person is (a) rich (person)
Here, 부자 acts as a noun, and the whole sentence is predicated by 이다. In this case, you might find it useful to use 이다 + ~ㄴ to describe an upcoming noun. For example:
내 친구는 부자인 아버지를 자랑했어 = My friend boasted about/was showing off his rich father
Another example using the word “불법” which, as a noun, translates to “illegal”:
슬기는 불법인 일을 하고 있어요 = Seulgi is doing something illegal
It is also common to see this form attached to somebody’s job title to describe their name. Sort of like saying “He is Rob, the CEO of Samsung”. For example
Titanic 배우인 Leonardo Dicaprio는 잘생겼어요 = Leonardo Dicaprio, who is an actor in Titanic is handsome
Here are some other sentences using other grammatical principles that you have not learned yet. I’m including these just so you can see that attaching ~ㄴ to 이다 is important to your Korean studies as you progress:
그 사람은 가난한 사람인 것처럼 행동했어요 = That person acted like a poor person (처럼 is introduced in Lesson 67)
그는 축구선수인 만큼 달리기를 잘해요 = He runs as well as a soccer athlete/player (만큼 is introduced in Lesson 72)
그 사람이 너의 아버지인 줄 몰랐어요 = I didn’t know that person is your father (줄 is introduced in Lesson 85)
In each case above, ~ㄴ is attached to 이다 to form “인”. You can see in each example that “인” is used to describe an upcoming noun. There are many more examples of how 이다 can be used to describe an upcoming noun like this, but I don’t need to include them all here, as you will learn about them as they become important.
~는지 is also added to 이다 in this same way. Again, because 이다 acts as an adjective ~ㄴ/은 should be added to it (이다 + ㄴ/은지 will always be ~인지). For example:
그 사람이 선생님인지 모르겠어요 = I don’t know if that person is a teacher 그 사람이 선생님인지 아닌지 모르겠어요 = I don’t know if that person is a teacher or not 우리가 동갑인지 몰랐어요 = I didn’t know that we were the same age 이것이 저의 엄마의 목걸인지 어떻게 알아요? = How do you know that this is my mother’s necklace?
Often times 이다 is attached to a question word to predicate a sentence. In this same sense, you will often see ~인지 attached to question words. For example:
Note that the pairs of sentences below are not dialogues. I organized them this way to show you the similar format that you can see between using ~인지 and using 이다 to predicate a sentence. 비상출구가 어디예요? = Where is the emergency exit? 비상출구가 어디인지 모르겠어요 = I don’t know where the emergency exit is
지금 몇 시예요? = What time is it now? 지금 몇 시인지 모르겠어요 = I don’t know what time it is now
당신의 목표가 뭐예요? = What is your goal? 저의 목표가 무엇인지 알아요? = Do you know what my goal is?
이 일의 관리자가 누구예요? = Who is the manager of this job? 이 일의 관리자가 누구인지 알아요? = Do you know who the manager of this job is?
가격이 얼마예요? = How much is this? 가격이 얼마인지 모르겠어요 = I don’t know how much the price is
It is also possible, as it is with attaching ~는 것 to a verb or ~ㄴ/은 것 to an adjective, to turn an entire clause into a noun, and then predicate the sentence using a verb. Just like how you learned how to write this sentence in Lesson 26:
I am only including the brackets below to show you that we are still using the same basic sentences of subject – object – verb.
저는 (사과)를 원해요 = I want apples 저는 (친구가 사과를 가져오는 것)을 원해요 = I want my friend to bring apples
You can do the same thing but with 이다 here:
내가 (열쇠를 안 가져온 것)을 깨달았어 = I realized that I didn’t bring my keys 내 (행동은 실수인 것)을 깨달았어 = I realized that my actions (what I did) is/was a mistake
분명히 -ㄹ/을 것이다 (bunmyeonghi -l/eul goes-ida) I am sure that, it must be
formation
분명히 + Verb Stem + -ㄹ/을 것이다
The first part, 분명히 (bunmyeonghi), is an adverb that means "clearly" or "certainly." ㄹ/을 것이다 (-l/eul goes-ida) is a way to express one's assumption or guess. So together, it means "I'm sure" or "must be," and we use these two parts like a pair quite often.
You change the word 분명히 (bunmyeonghi) to other words to alter the nuance of the statement. For example, if you say 아마 (ama - "maybe") instead of 분명히 (bunmyeonghi), the phrase means, "it could be" instead of "it must be."
The last part, 것이다 (geos-ida), changes depending on the politeness level.
basic: 거야 (geo-ya)
Standard: 거예요 (geo-yeyo)
Formal: 것입니다 (geos-imnida)
Formation
분명히 + Verb Stem + -ㄹ/을 것이다
오늘 (oneul) - "today" 오늘이다 (oneul-ida) - "to be today" 분명히 + 오늘이 + ㄹ 것이다 = 분명히 오늘일 것이다 (bunmyeonghi oneul-il geosida) 분명히 오늘일 거예요. bunmyeonghi oneul-il geo-yeyo. "I'm sure it's today." / "It must be today."
Sentences
이건 분명히 실수일 거예요. igeon bunmyeonghi silsu-il geo-yeyo. "I'm sure this must be a mistake."
내일은 분명히 추울 거예요. naeil-eun bunmyeonghi chuul geo-yeyo. "I'm sure it's going to be cold tomorrow."
분명히 곧 전화가 올 거예요. bunmyeonghi got jeonhwa-ga ol geo-yeyo. "I'm sure you'll get a phone call soon."
분명히 괜찮을 거예요. bunmyeonghi gwaenchaneul geo-yeyo. "It must be okay."
분명히 현우일 거예요. bunmyeonghi hyeonu-il geo-yeyo "It must be Hyunwoo."
- 는 법이다 neun (eu)n beobida   Its certain that
same as 기 마련이다 means be matter of course or be sure. it is pretty similar so it's ok if u use one instead of another. Definition: when we say expectation 는 법이다 and when we say after something happens 기 마련이다
For verbs: V는법이다 (e.g. 받는 법이다). For adjectives: A(으)ㄴ 법이다 (e.g. 좋은 법이다).
기대가 클수록 실망도 큰 법이죠. The more you get your hopes up, the more you’ll be disappointed.
싸고 성능이 좋은 물건은 잘 팔리는 법이예요. Inexpensive, good quality products are certain to sell well.
서두르면 실수하는 법이다. If you go fast you’re certain to make a mistake
-(으)ㄹ 법하다-(eu)l beob hada  Be likely
그가 왔을 법하다 He must have arrived.
그 일이 될 법하다 It seems likely to succeed.
비가 올 법하다 It looks like rain
-기 마련이다-gi maryeonida It's expected that, -bound to be a certain way,
Among many expressions that mean the same thing, this expression is more commonly used in proverbs or sayings. We also more commonly use this when talking about general rules in life.
Formation Verb stem + -기/게 + 마련이다 (Both -기 마련이다 and -게 마련이다 are accepted.)
Sentences
돈이 있으면 쓰게 마련이다. don-i isseumyeon sseuge maryeonida. "If you have money, it's predictable that you will spend it."
자주 만나면 친해지게 마련이에요. jaju mannamyeon chinhaejige maryeonieyo. "If you meet often, you naturally will get closer to each other."
외국에 나가면 가족 생각이 나게 마련이야. oeguk-e nagamyeon gajok saenggak-i nage maryeoniya. "When you go abroad, it's most natural that you start missing your family."
시간은 어떻게든 흐르기 마련이에요. sigan-eun eotteokedeun heureugi maryeonieyo. "Time is bound to pass anyway."
성공이 있으면 실패도 있기 마련이에요. seonggong-i isseumyeon, silpae-do itgi maryeonieyo. "When there is success, there is bound to be failures, too."
Uncertainity
-ㄴ/-은 는 감이 있다-n, eun,neun  gami issda   Feel like to seem somewhat....
Formation
Descriptive Verbs  V -ㄴ/은 감이 있다: Action Verbs
I. Descriptive Verbs
vowel - ㄴ 감이 있다
크다[Keuda]: "to be big" 큰 감이 있다[keun gami itda]: "It's somewhat big" or "I feel that it is a bit big"
비싸다[bissada]: "to be expensive" 비싼 감이 있다[Bissan gami itda]: "It's somewhat expensive." or "I feel that it is a bit expensive"
consonant -은 감이 있다
작다[jakda]: "to be small" 작은 감이 있다[jageun gami itda]:"It's somewhat small" or "I feel that it is a bit small"
짧다[jjaltta]: " to be short" 짧은 감이 있다[jalbeun gami itda]:"It's somewhat short" or "I feel that it is a bit short"
Sentences
영화가 좀 너무 단순한 감이 있어. Yeonghwa-ga jom neomu dansunhan gam-i isseo. - This movie is somewhat too simple.
저 선생님 수업은 지겨운 감이 있어서 싫어요. Jeo seonsaengnim sueop-eun jigyeoun gam-i isseoseo ireoyo. - That teacher's class is kind of boring so I don't like it.
좀 늦은 감이 있지만... Jom neujeun gam-i itjiman. - Although I feel that it's a bit late...
이 배우는 연기력이 부족한 감이 있어요. I baeu-neun yeongiryeok-i bujokan gam-i isseoyo - I feel that this actor is lacking some acting skills.
바가지 쓰는 감이 있지만, 그냥 살래. Bagaji sseuneun gam-i itjiaman, geunyang sallae. - I kind of feel that it's a rip-off, but I'll still buy it.
100 bolimyeon jogeum bissan gami issneyo i feel like 100 dollars was a bit too expensive
haru jeone yeyag haneun geoseun neujeun gami issseubnida i feel like is too late to make a reservation one day before
Notes
감[gam] comes from the Chinese character (感), which means feeling, therefore the phrase is translated like "I feel that it is ..." or "I think it's kind of ...".
-ㄴ/은/는 것 같다[-n/eun/neun geot gatda].I “it seems…” 
Formation
Descriptive verbs-                                -ㄴ/은 것 같다 Action verbs Present -는 것 같다 Past -ㄴ/은것 같다  Futureㄹ/을 것 같다
ida is conjugated like descriptive verb
Conjugation part
것 같다 것 같아 (basic) 것 같아요 (standard) 것 같습니다 (formal)
I.Descriptive Verbs
Verb Stem-ㄴ/은 것 같다
vowel + -ㄴ 것 같다
편하다[pyeonhada]: "to be comfortable" 편한 것 같다[pyeonhan geot gatda]: “it seems to be comfortable” or “I think (it) is comfortable.”
비싸다[bissada]: "to be expensive" 비싼 것 같다[bissan geot gatda]: “it seems to be expensive” or “I think (it) is expensive.”
예쁘다[yeppeuda]: "to be pretty" 예쁜 것 같다[yeppeun geot gatda]: “it seems to be pretty” or “I think (it) is pretty.”
consonant + -은 것 같다
많다[manta]: "to be many" 많은 것 같다[maneun geot gatda]: “it seems like there are many” or “(I) think there are many.”
적다[jeokda]: "to be a little" 적은 것 같다[jeogeun geot gatda]: “it seems like there are a little” or “(I) think there are a little.”
II..Action Verbs
Present Tense / Verb Stem + -는 것 같다
오다[oda]: "to come" 오는 것 같다[oneun geot gatda] i think he comes
모르다[moreuda]: "to not know" 모르는 것 같다[moreuneun geot gatda]: "I think he doesn't know."
도착하다[do-chakhada]: "to arrive" 도착하는 것 같다[dochakhaneun geot gatda]: "I think he arrives."
사다[sada]: "to buy" 사는 것 같다[saneun geot gatayo]:"I think he buys."
Past Tense / Verb Stem ㄴ 것 같다
오다[oda]: "to come"   온 것 같다[on geot gatda]: "I think he came"
모르다[moreuda]: "to not know"   모른 것 같다[moreun geot gatda]: "I think he didn't know."
도착하다[do-chakhada]: "to arrive" 도착한 것 같다[dochakhan geot gatda]: "I think he arrived."
사다[sada]: "to buy" 산 것 같다[san geot gatayo]:"I think he bought."
Future Tense /Verb Stem ㄹ/을 것 같다
l verbs omit l
except
The verbs 걷다(to walk), 듣다(to listen), 묻다(to ask), 싣다(to load) are changed to 걸을/들을/물을/실을 + 것 같다
오다[oda]: "to come"   올 것 같다[ol geot gatda]: "I think he will come"
모르다[moreuda]: "to rise"   모를 것 같다[moreul geot gatda]: "I think he will know."
도착하다[do-chakhada]: "to arrive" 도착할 것 같다[dochakhal geot gatda]: "I think he will arrive."
사다[sada]: "to buy" 살 것 같다[sal geot gatayo]:"I think I'll buy it."
Sentences
I.Descriptive Verbs
아저씨 집은 비싼 것 같아요. Ajeossi jip-eun bissan geot gatayo. Mister, your house seems to be expensive.
성민은 수줍어하는 것 같아. Seongmin-eun sujubeohaneun geot gata. Seongmin seems to be shy.
현철은 바쁜 것 같다. Hyeoncheol-eun bappeun geot gatta. HyeonCheol seems to be busy.
이게 더 좋은 것 같아요. [i-ge deo jo-eun geot ga-ta-yo.] = I think this is better.
(Negation) 오스틴은 아픈 것 같지 않다. Oseutin-eun apeun geot gatji. anhda Austin does not seem to be hurt.
오스틴은 아프지 않은 것 같다. Oseutin-eun apeuji aneun geot gatda. Austin seems like he is not hurt.
ida
이거 뭐인 것 같아요? [i-geo mwo-in geot ga-ta-yo?] = What do you think this is?
II.Action Verbs
Present Tense
그녀는 오는 것 같아요. Geunyeoneun oneun geot gatayo. "I think she comes."
Past Tense
아들이 온 것 같어. Adeuri on geot gateo. "I think my son came."
도착한 것 같아요. Dochakhan geot gatayo. "I think we've arrived.."
누가 한 것 같아요? [nu-ga han geot ga-ta-yo?] = Who do you think did it?
Future Tense
살 것 같아요. sal geot gatayo. "I think I'll buy it."
곧 도착할 것 같아요. [got do-chak-hal geot ga-ta-yo.] I think I’ll arrive soon
그는 내일 올 것 같아요. Geuneun nae-il ol geot gatayo. I think he will come tomorrow as well.
이 카페 곧 닫을 것 같아요. I kape got dadeul goet gatayo. I think this cafe is going to close soon.
저는 5시에도 여기에 있을 것 같아요. Jeoneun daseotsi-edo yeogie itseul geot gatayo. I think I'll still be here at 5.
6시에는 여기에 없을 것 같아요. Yeoseotsi-eneun yeogie eopseul geot gatayo. I think he won't be here at 6.
올 것 같아 I think he will come 올 것 같아요 I think he will come 올 것 같습니다 I think he will come
Tenses
벌써 한 것 같아요. [beol-sseo han geot ga-ta-yo.] = I think (they/he/she/I/you) already did it. 지금 하는 것 같아요. [ji-geum ha-neun geot ga-ta-yo.] = I think (someone) does/is doing it now. 내일 할 것 같아요. [nae-il hal geot ga-ta-yo.] = I think (someone) will do it tomorrow.
notes
것 + 같다 [gat-da] on its own means “to be the same” when it is used with other nouns, it means “it is like
학생 같아요. [hak-saeng ga-ta-yo.] =  You look like a student. 저 사람 한국 사람 같아요. [han-guk sa-ram ga-ta-yo.] = He looks like a Korean person.
것이다 is often replaced with 거다. It is a pronunciation change that occurs in natural conversation.
- 었/았/였던 것 같다neun (eu)n , (eu)l deon geos gatda   It seems - 1.  You can also use it when you have an unclear memory about a past situation. (Often used when talking about when you were younger). 2. Looking at an ancient painting or artifact and trying to make suppositions about how people lived/events that happened a long time ago. 3Making a guess about someone else’s mood in a past situation 4. Making a guess about a previous situation based on the circumstances.
Can be used with not only verbs but also nouns; N이었던/였던 것 같다
-을거예요(eu)l geoyeyo  I think, I guess I suppose, I think
-ㄹ/을 거야[-l /eul geoya] -ㄹ/을거예요(eu)l geoyeyo -ㄹ/을 겁니다[-l / eul geomnida].
This is the same form as the intentional, but is not of the same meaning. While the intentional expresses an intention or a plan to do something in the future, here, when this grammatical structure can express a suppositive or assumptive statement about all tenses.
Formation ▶ Future / Present Tense
vowel -ㄹ 거야 -ㄹ/을거예요(eu)l geoyeyo or  - ㄹ 겁니다
가다[gada] – “to go”
갈 거야[gal geoya] - intimate
갈 거예요[gal geo-yeyo] - standard
갈 겁니다[gal geomnida] - formal
he will probably go there
consonant + -을 거야  or  - 을 겁니다
잡다[japda] – “to catch”
잡을 거야[jabeul geoya] - intimate
잡을 거예요[jabeul geo-yeyo] - standard
잡을 겁니다[jabeul geomnida] - formal
“I will probably catch...”
Verb stems ending with ㄹ + -거야  or  - 겁니다
▶ Past Tense
- Verb stem of the past form + -을 거야 or -을 겁니다
가다[gada] – “to go”   갔다[gatda]: "went"
갔을 거야[gatseul geoya] - intimate
갔을 거예요[gatseul geo-yeyo] - standard
갔을 겁니다[gatseul geomnida] - formal
"(He) probably went...”
잡다[japda] – “to catch”   잡았다[jabatda]: "caught"
잡았을 거야[jabatseul geosida](intimate)
잡았을 거예요[jabatseul geo-yeyo] (standard)
잡았을 겁니다[jabatseul geomnida] (formal)
“(He) probably caught”
너는 모를 거야. Neo-neun moreul geo-ya. - I probably don't know.
한 시간 정도 걸릴 거야. Han sigan jeong-do geolril geo-ya. - I guess it'll take about an hour.
집에 갔을 거야! Jib-e gatseul geoya! - She probably went home.
엄마는 놀랐을 거야. Eomma-neun nollasseul geo-ya. - I think my mom was surprised.
나도 내일 영화볼거야. nado naeil yeonghwa bol geoya. "I'm going to watch a movie tomorrow
나도 내일 영화 볼 거야. Nado naeil yeonghwa bol geoya. "I will probably watch a movie tomorrow, too."
-gessneyo/ gesseoyo   You must be
-겠- You can use -겠- to ask someone’s intention, to express what you are going to do, to talk about something that will happen, to show your assumption about something, or to talk about possibilities or capabilities. It is also often used in fixed expressions such as 처음 뵙겠습니다 (= Nice to meet you.) and 잘 먹겠습니다 (= Thank you for the food.).
1. -시겠어요? / -시겠습니까? = “Would you …?” “Would you like to …?” This usage is only used in very formal Korean. In more casual Korean, you would use -(으)ㄹ래 (요)? (Review Level 4 Lesson 2 for this grammar point). The honorific suffix -시- is always used with -겠- in this usage.
어디로 가시겠어요? [eo-di-ro ga-si-ge-sseo-yo?] = Where would you like to go? Similar: 어디로 갈래(요)?
2. -겠- (used to express one’s intention) = I’m going to …, I’d like to ... Mostly used in formal Korean, -겠- can also express one’s intention to do something. In more casual Korean, the same meaning can be expressed through -(으)ㄹ게(요) (Review Level 3 Lesson 6 for this grammar point).
Ex) 제가 하겠습니다. [ je-ga ha-ge-sseum-ni-da] = I’ll do it. 말하지 않겠습니다. [ma-ra-ji an-ke-sseum-ni-da] = I won’t tell you.
3. -겠- (used to express one’s opinion/idea/assumption) = I think, I guess, I assume This is the most common usage of -겠- in casual and everyday conversation in Korean. You can use -겠- to show your opinion or assumption about something or what will happen, but you also give a nuance that you are somewhat careful with your opinion.
Ex) 이게 좋겠어요. [i-ge jo-ke-sseo-yo.] = I think this will be good
4. -겠- used in fixed expressions In addition to the usages above, -겠- is also commonly used in some fixed expressions. Ex) 알겠습니다. [al-ge-sseum-ni-da.] = I got it. I understand.
Ex) 모르겠어요 [mo-reu-ge-sseo-yo.] = I don’t get it. I don’t know. I am not sure. V-na boda   tt 5 4 A(eu)n ga boda It looks like hk 109      tt5 5
we learned that 것 같다 can be used to say that something seems like something else. It can be used to speculate about or give an uncertain opinion on something in the past, present, or future. Today, we will look at a similar structure.
This is different from 것 같다 in that 것 같다 does not necessarily require the speaker to have observed something to use as the basis of their statement. Let’s learn how to use them.
-(으)ㄴ가 보다 -(으)ㄴ가 보다 can be used with descriptive verbs only in the present tense and with both descriptive and action verbs in the future tense. For the present tense, simply attach -은가 보다 to verb roots ending with consonants and -ㄴ가 보다 to roots ending with vowels. For the future tense, apply the future tense -(으)ㄹ 것이다 to the verb root and then add -(으)ㄴ가 보다 to that. It will come out looking like -(으)ㄹ 것인가 보다 or, to shorten it up, -(으)ㄹ 건가 보다.
PRESENT:
아연 씨는 보통은 고기를 잘 먹는데 오늘은 거의 안 먹네요. 배가 아픈가 봐요. (Ayeon usually loves meat [eats meat well] but today she’s hardly eating. It looks like she has a stomachache. 정원 씨는 시험을 치르는 데 3시간 다 필요했는데 호찬 씨는 1시간 안에 문제를 다 푼 데다가 점수가 잘 나왔어요. 머리가 엄청 좋은가 봐요. (Jeongwon needed the full three hours for the test, but Hochan finished within an hour and got a good score. It looks like he’s really smart [It looks like his head is really good].) FUTURE:
유정 씨는 오래 전부터 언젠가 미국여행 가겠다고 노래 불렀어요*. 요즘 돈을 많이 모으고 영어를 열심히 공부하고 있는 걸 보니 드디어 갈 건가 봐요. (Yujeong has been saying for a long time that she will travel to the US eventually. Seeing how she’s saving money and studying English hard, it looks like she will finally go.) 일기예보를 듣고 보니 내일도 정말 무더울 건가 봐요. (Listening to the weather report, it looks like tomorrow will be really muggy too.) *노래를 부르다— While this usually means “to sing (a song),” it is also used as an expression meaning that someone says something over and over.
-나 보다 -나 보다 is used for action verbs in the past and present tense, AND for descriptive verbs in the past tense. It can not be used with the future tense.
PAST:
학교 축구장은 진흙밭이 다 됐네요. 비가 많이 왔나 봐요. (The school soccer field turned into a mud pit. It looks like it rained a lot.) 아이들이 선생님의 퍼즐을 잘 못 풀었어요. 너무 어려웠나 봐요. (The children couldn’t solve the teacher’s puzzle. It looks like it was too difficult.)
PRESENT:
동생의 방에서 코 고는 소리가 들려요. 낮잠을 자고 있나 봐요. (The sound of snoring is coming from my younger brother’s room. It looks like he’s napping.) 요리법을 읽고 보니 이거 만드는 데 40분이나 걸리나 봐요. 우리 시간이 있어요? (Looking at the recipe, it looks like it takes about 40 minutes to make this. Do we have time?)
- a/eo boida  Appears to be not found
-na haessda  s.unten -V + 는/ㄴ/은 + 가 했다(eu)n ga haessda I thought that  not found
Verb + 나 했다  : This pattern is equivalent to the phrase I wondered why/where/how ~
왜 그 여자가 화가 났나 했어.  I wonder why that girl got angry 영화가 몇 시에 시작하나 했어.I wonder when the movie starts. 어젯밤 왜 날 안 전화했나 했어. I wonder why he didn't call last night. 왜 그 여자가 울고 있었나 했어요. I wonder why that girl was crying.
~(으)ㄴ걸(요)-(eu)l  geolyo   I bet, think
noun ~인걸(요) = verb ~(으)ㄴ걸(요),
열쇠는 니가 가진걸, 나한테 왜 물어봐? = you have the keys, why are you asking me? 너무 늦게 왔어. 표가 다 팔린걸 = I came too late. The tickets were all sold out . 저는 정신이 멀쩡한 걸요 = I’m as sober as I can be. 왜 나를 떠나? 너는 나의 처음이자 마지막인걸 = Why are you leaving me? You are my first and last.
~(으)ㄹ 걸 (그랬다) = shows regret 공부를 더 열심히 할 걸 = I should have studied more. 나도 생일파티에 갈걸 그랬다 = If only I went to the party. 그 여자한테 전화번호를 물어볼 걸 그랬다 = I wish I asked her phone number. 미안해. 너한테 미리 말을 할 걸 = Sorry. I should have told you before. 학교에 안올걸 = I wish I did not came to school. 그 영화 재밌어? 나도 같이 볼걸 그랬다 = Is the movie good? I wish I watched it with you, too.
~(으)ㄹ걸요, ~았/었을걸요 = unconfirmed assumption or proposition, probably
(*this is use only in speaking with friends, never written)
진영 씨는 똑똑할걸요 = JinYoung is probably pretty smart 드라마 배우 일걸요 = He’s probably a drama star. 여기에 앉을걸 = I guess you could sit here. 그 분은 게을렀을걸요 = He was probably just lazy. 책을 읽었을걸요 = I probably read that book. 그 책은 외국 학생이 읽기에 좀 어려울걸요 = I guess that book probably will be difficult for foreign student to read.
-(eu)l ggayo?Do you think
s. intentions
-(eu)l jido moreudaNot sure if
Adjective/Verb + (으)ㄹ지도 모르다: This pattern is equivalent to the phrase 'it might ~' or 'it may ~.'
비가 올지도 몰라요 It might rain 시험에 떨어질지도 몰라. It might fail the exam. 지은이는 도서관에 있지도 몰라.  JiEun may be in library. -(eu)l  tende   I guess that hk 100
Iyou learned that sentences in this form most likely end with the final verb being conjugated in this form: ~았/었을 것이다.
날씨가 좋았더라면 저는 공원에 갔을 거예요 = If it was nice out, I would have gone 날씨가 좋았더라도 저는 공원에 안 갔을 거예요  = Even if it was nice out, I still wouldn’t have gone
제가 돈이 있었더라면 그것을 샀을 거예요 = If I had money, I would have bought that 제가 돈이 있었더라도 그것을 안 샀을 거예요 = Even if I had money, I wouldn’t have bought that
In each of these cases, whenever you have an “if” or “even if” sentence in the past, followed by a clause that would have happened (or not happened), you can replace 거예요 with 텐데(요). For example:
날씨가 좋았더라면 저는 공원에 갔을 텐데요 = If it was nice out, I would have gone 날씨가 좋았더라도 저는 공원에 안 갔을 텐데요  = Even if it was nice out, I still wouldn’t have gone
제가 돈이 있었더라면 그것을 샀을 텐데요 = If I had money, I would have bought that 제가 돈이 있었더라도 그것을 안 샀을 텐데요 = Even if I had money, I wouldn’t have bought that
This can also be done when the “if/even if” sentence is in the present tense as well, but only if the second clause is a supposition that would happen if the first clause were true. For example:
내가 돈이 있으면 그것을 살 텐데 = I would buy that if I had money
When 텐데 is used in a sentence, it is done because the speaker has a certain feeling that he/she wants to express. It is very hard to express a feeling in words, and especially one that is elicited from the use of a word in a foreign language, but I will try my best to explain this feeling to you.
It makes sense to me to split up this feeling and describe them in different sections. The thing is, the feeling“텐데” has is actually a combination of all of these descriptions, but I feel that different situations elicit a slightly different feeling. Therefore, after reading all of my descriptions below, realize that 텐데 is actually a combination of all of those feelings.
————————————————————————-
For sentences that have “if…” in the past tense, the reason for using 텐데 (vs. not using it) is very subtle. For example, in these two sentences:
날씨가 좋았더라면 저는 공원에 갔을 거예요 = If it was nice out, I would have gone 날씨가 좋았더라면 저는 공원에 갔을 텐데요 = If it was nice out, I would have gone
Their meanings are virtually the same. However, in the sentence with “텐데”, there is a slight nuance/feeling of regret. There is no way I can translate this into words, but it is there. Because of this, you typically only see this type of sentence when you want to express this nuance/feeling. There, a sentence with a similar structure but no feeling of regret should typically would not use 텐데. For example:
뛰다가 조심하지 않았다면 넘어졌을 거예요 = If I wasn’t careful when I was running, I would have fallen
Here, under most situations, it would be strange to write that sentence like this: 뛰다가 조심하지 않았다면 넘어졌을 텐데요
————————————————————————-
For sentences that have “even if…” in the past or present tense, the reason for using 텐데 (vs. not using it) is also very subtle. For example, in these two sentences:
날씨가 좋았더라도 저는 공원에 안 갔을 거예요 = Even if it was nice out, I still wouldn’t have gone 날씨가 좋았더라도 저는 공원에 안 갔을 텐데요 = Even if it was nice out, I still wouldn’t have gone
Their meanings are virtually the same. However, in the sentence with “텐데”, there is a slight nuance/feeling of being annoyed. This is technically the same as the feeling of “regret” in my description above, but it feels closer to an annoying feeling when used with ~더라도. For example:
날씨가 좋았더라도 저는 공원에 안 갔을 텐데요 = Even if it was nice out, I still wouldn’t have gone 제가 돈이 있었더라도 그것을 안 샀을 텐데요 = Even if I had money, I wouldn’t have bought that
Again, it is very hard to translate this specific feeling of “텐데”, but its addition brings the translation closer to something like:
Ugh, even if it was nice out, I still wouldn’t have gone, and Ugh, even if I had money, I wouldn’t have bought that
————————————————————————-
For sentences that have “if” in the present tense, the reason for using 텐데 (vs. not using it) is also very subtle. For example, in these two sentences:
음식이 더 있으면 좋을 거야 = It would be good if there was more food 음식이 더 있으면 좋을 텐데 = It would be good if there was more food
Their meanings are virtually the same. However, in the sentence with “텐데”, there is a slight nuance/feeling of “oh, that’s too bad”. This is technically the same as the feeling of “regret” and “being annoyed” in my descriptions above, but it feels closer to a “that’s too bad” feeling when used with “if” in the present tense like this. Again, it is very hard to translate the specific use of “텐데”, but its addition bring the translation closer to something like:
음식이 더 있으면 좋을 텐데 = Oh, it’s too bad there isn’t more food, because if there were, I would eat it
Here’s another example:
친구가 빨리 왔으면 좋을 텐데 = Ugh, I wish my friend would come quickly/It would be nice if my friend came quickly
Remember what I said at the beginning of these descriptions – the feeling that I’m trying to describe is actually a combination of all of these… all taken on by one word. I’m trying to compartmentalize them, but try to realize that they’re actually all the same feeling. Because of that, any sentence using 텐데 could have any of these feelings, it’s really up to the mood and context of the sentence. For example, in this sentence:
날씨가 좋더라도 나는 갈 수 없어 = Even if the weather is nice, I can’t go 날씨가 좋더라도 나는 갈 수 없을 텐데 = Even if the weather is nice, I can’t go
The purpose of using “텐데” in the second example is to express this nuance/feeling. What is the feeling? Well, it’s a combination of regret (maybe less so), and being annoyed and saying “oh, that’s too bad”. You’ll see this same feeling talked about in the next section, but in that section I talk about it being used as a “worry” feeling.
-ㄹ/을 텐데' eul tende I am afraid that, I suppose that   It might have been
Formation
Present or Past Verb Stem + ㄹ/을 텐데 [tende] - "it would/could/should/might be or have been"
examples
많다 "to be many/much" 많을 텐데 "there could be many/much"
만날 텐데 "could meet"
Sentences
지금은 여름이라 수영장에 사람들이 많을 텐데... Jigeumeun yeoreum-ira suyeongjange saramdeuli maneultende... "There could be many people in the swimming pool since it is summer..."
거기에 가면 그를 만날 텐데... Geogie gamyeon geureul man-nal tende... "You could meet him if you go there..."
동대문에 가면 다양한 옷들을 볼 텐데... Dongdaemune dayanghan maneun ot-deuleul bol tende... "(We) could see various types of clothing if you go to Dongdaemun..."
작년에 그 수영장에 갔었다면 많은 사람들을 보았었을 텐데... Jang-nyeone geu su-yeongjang-e gasseotdamyeon maneun saramdeureul bo-asseosseul tende... "(You) should have seen many people if you went to that swimming pool last year..."
By placing ~ㄹ/을 텐데 at the end of a sentence, you can indicate that you suppose or expect something to be the case. This is typically done when the speaker is not the acting agent (the subject/topic) in the sentence. For example:
비가 올 텐데 = It will probably rain (I suppose that it will rain) 날씨가 추울 텐데 = The weather will probably be cold 그가 집에 없을 텐데 = He probably won’t be home
difference between those sentences, and the following sentences:”
비가 올 것 같아 = It will probably rain 추울 것 같아 = The weather will probably be cold 그가 집에 없을 것 같아 = He probably won’t be home
When you use ~ㄹ/을 텐데, you are slightly more sure of something happening (sort of like the difference between (“I might,” and “I will probably.)
When you use ~ㄹ/을 텐데, you are indicating a very slight feeling of being worried, annoyed, thinking “too bad” (where appropriate depending on the context). For example, in the sentence:
추울 텐데 = The weather will probably be cold…
You are indicating that the weather will probably be cold – and, as a result of that – you are a little bit worried or irritated (depending on the context).
More examples:
그 식당이 이미 닫았을 텐데 = The restaurant is probably already closed
퇴근시간이라서 길이 막힐 텐데 = The roads will probably be jammed because it is rush hour
Using ~ㄹ/을 텐데 (or ~ㄹ/을 테니까) in the middle of a sentence
you can use this usage of ~ㄹ/을 텐데 to connect two clauses as well. The meaning it takes when used like this is “it is probable that… so.” For example:
그 식당이 이미 닫았을 텐데 가지 말자 = The restaurant will probably already be closed, so let’s not go 길이 막힐 텐데 지하철로 가자 = The roads will probably be jammed, so let’s take the subway 우유가 없을 텐데 하나만 사세요 = We probably don’t have any milk, so buy one
Just by the nature of the first clause, the second clause is usually some sort of a suggestion. However, not always:
부장님이 없었을 텐데 그래도 부장님을 만나러 회사에 갔어요?  = The boss probably wasn’t there, regardless, did you go to work to meet him?
Also notice that these constructions are essentially the same as:
~ㄹ/을 것 같아서
For example:
길이 막힐 텐데 지하철로 가자 = The roads will probably be jammed, so let’s take the subway 길이 막힐 것 같아서 지하철로 가자 = The roads will probably be jammed, so let’s take the subway
Using ~ㄹ/을 테니까 in this way creates a very similar (if not identical) meaning to ~ㄹ/을 텐데:
길이 막힐 테니까 지하철로 가자 = The roads will probably be jammed, so let’s take the subway 그 식당이 이미 닫았을 테니까 가지 말자 = The restaurant will probably already be closed, so let’s not go 우유가 없을 테니까 하나만 사세요 = We probably don’t have any milk, so buy one
Other examples: 학생들이 이 내용을 이해하지 못할 테니까 이 내용까지만 하세요 = The students probably won’t understand this content, so just teach them only up until this point 학생들이 이 내용을 이해하지 못할 텐데 이 내용까지만 하세요 = The students probably won’t understand this content, so just teach them only up until this point
You can also use both of these ~ㄹ/을 텐데 and ~ㄹ/을 테니까 to indicate that you are going to (or intend to) do something – and the second clause reflects that.
Now, you will often see sources indicating that it is acceptable to use either ~ㄹ/을 텐데 or ~ㄹ/을 테니까 to express this usage of “intention.” It is more common and more natural to use ~ㄹ/을 테니까 and not ~ㄹ/을 텐데. Note that this only applies to this one specific meaning of “intention.” Some examples:
지금 갈 테니까 조금 더 기다려 주세요 = I’m going to leave now, so wait just a little bit longer 제가 돈을 많이 벌 테니까 걱정하지 마세요 = I am going to earn a lot of money, so don’t worry
You could also, in theory, end a sentence with this usage. However, you should treat these as incomplete sentences, and they can only really be used when the second clause can be assumed from context. This is similar to ending a sentence with “아/어서.” For example:
걱정 마. 내가 돈을 많이 벌 거라서… = Don’t worry. Because I’m going to earn a lot of money. 걱정 마. 내가 돈을 많이 벌 테니까… = Don’t worry. Because I’m going to earn a lot of money
Notes
The Structure of 텐데 [tende] 텐데 basically comes from 터 + 이 + ㄴ데 → 터인데 [teoinde] → 텐데 [tende] - 터 is 'a dependable noun' that indicates "a (previous) expectation, presumption, will (intention), and a state (condition)" of a speaker".   - 이 is 'the stem of a word' - ㄴ데 is 'the ending of a word' - therefore, 터 + 이 + ㄴ데 becomes 터인데 [teoinde] = 텐데 [tende] "it would/could/should/might be or have been" Second, now let's take a look at the conjuagation rules
.ttk 9 16
으)ㄹ 테니까 -할테니까-eultenikka, -haltenikka I will do -, so  I suppose
Formation
V/S + ㄹ /을 테니까
vowel  ㄹ 테니까
도와주다 [dowajuda] "to help / to assist" 도와주 + ㄹ 테니까 도와줄 테니까 "I will help, so..."
놀다 [nolda] "to play" 놀 + 테니까 놀 테니까 "I will play, so..."
consonant  을 테니까
넣다 [neo-ta] "to put / 넣 + 을 테니까 넣을 테니까 "I will put, so..."
Sentences
1. It means "will" when the speaker "I" is talking about the speaker's own action because the speaker "I" is sure of it
내가 도와 줄 테니까 걱정하지 마. [도와주다 "to help" → 도와줄 테니까 "I will help (you), so..." ] Naega dowajul tenikka geokjeonghaji ma. "I will help you, so don't worry."
내가 갈 테니까 기달려.  [가다 "to go"→ 갈 테니까 "I will go, so..."] Naega gal tenikka gidalryeo. "I will be there, so wait (for me)."
2. indicates 'probable actions/outcomes' when the subject is someone (or something) other than "I" It means "probably" because the sentence is talking about other peoples actions; so it's more of a guess/presumption
조만간 비가 올 테니까 우산 가지고 와야해. [(비가) 오다"to come"→ 올 테니까 "The rain is probably coming, so..."] Jo-man-gan biga ol tenikka u-san gajigo wa-yaha. "It's probably raining sooner or later, so you should bring an umbrella with you."
아이가 놀 테니까 자리를 비켜주자. [놀다"to play"→ 놀 테니까 "A boy (baby) is probably playing, so..."] Ai-ga nol tenikka jarireul bikyeojuja. "A baby is probably playing (here), so let's give him a room to play."
곧 기름을 다 넣을 테니까 갈 준비를 하자. [넣다 "to put"→ 넣을 테니까 "He/she is probably putting, so..."] Got gireum-eul da neoeul tenikka gal junbireul haja. "The car is probably filled up with gas soon, so be prepared to drive."
expresses a connection between two actions, one being a reason / background / condition for the other. There are many other ways to say "so" and "therefore," but you use this structure when you want to say that you will do something or something will take place, so you want the other person to do something accordingly, or you want something else to happen as a result.
The word 터 means "place," "condition," "position," or "status," so the entire structure literally means "things are in a status where..." or "things are in a way that _____ something, therefore you do ______." So you can use this structure when you want to express that you are doing or going to do something as a result or in reaction to something else or that you want someone to do something in reaction to something.
Original meaning -테니(까) comes from the combination of 터 and -이니(까). 터 means a “place”, “site”, “lot”, “ground”, or “foundation”. There are mainly two usages for this structure: 1. When you are offering to do something and you ask the listener to do something else in return. What you ask of the other person doesn’t always have to be a favor that you want; it can also be something that you want them to do for their own good. Therefore, -(으)ㄹ 테니(까) is often translated as “I will do this, so in return, I want you to do this”. As a result, you can notuse this structure for all situations where you say “therefore” or “so”. Example 이건 제가 할 테니까, 걱정하지 말고 쉬세요. = I will do this, so don’t worry and get some rest. In the sentence above, you are offering to take care of something and telling the other person to go get some rest. You cannot use the same structure about someone else doing the same thing. For example, “이건 석진 씨가 할 테니까, 걱정하지 말고 쉬세요” is not a natural sentence.
If you want to say something like “Seokjin will take care of this, so don’t worry” in Korean either just use the -을 거니까 ending and say “진 씨가 할 거니까”, or you can keep yourself as the subject of the sentence by saying “이건 석진 씨한테 하라고 할 테니까”, meaning “I will ask Seokjin to do this, so…”.
2. When you are making an assumption and are almost certain about something, you can use this structure to mean “I assume/think/believe that this will happen/is happening, so let’s do this/please do this.” Even when you are talking about a present state or action, since you’re assuming and WILL have to check to see if you’re right, it’s always in the future tense. Example 밖에 추울 테니까 나가지 마세요. = It must be cold outside, so don’t go out. If you are NOT making an assumption and just saying a plainly known fact, you can use the -( 으)니까 structure and just say “밖에 추우니까”. The -(으)ㄹ 테니(까) structure is often used together with -(으)면, which means “if”. For example, if you say “지금 밖에 나가면 추울 테니까”, it means “if you go outside now, it will be cold, so…” Sample Sentences 1. 제가 점심 살 테니까, 경화 씨가 커피 사세요. = I will buy lunch, so Kyung-hwa, you buy the coffee. 2. 저는 먼저 갈 테니까, 나중에 오세요. = I will go first, so you come late
나머지는 제가 할 테니까, 먼저 퇴근하세요. = I’ll do the rest, so please go home first. 4. 저는 뛰어갈 테니까, 효진 씨는 택시 타고 오세요. = I’ll run, so Hyojin, you take a taxi. 5. 갑자기 찾아가면 놀랄 테니까, 전화를 할까요? = If we visit her suddenly, she’ll be surprised, so shall we call her
~(으)ㄴ/는 모양이다-neun (eu)n/eul moyang ida  It appears that
Formation
Noun
(present) 인 모양이다 (past)였단/이였단 모양이다
Descriptive Verb Tenses
(present)~(으)ㄴ 모양이다 past)~았/었단 모양이다 ( (future)~(으)ㄹ 모양이다
Action Verb Tenses
~는 모양이다 (present) ~(으)ㄴ 모양이다 (past) ~(으)ㄹ 모양이다 (future)
지금 학생들이 바이올린을 연습 하는 모양이야. I guess the students are practicing violin now.
방에 영화 DVD가 있는 걸 보니까 밤늦게까지 영화를 본 모양이에요. Seeing that there are some DVDs in his room, I guess he watched movies until late at night.
이 컴퓨터가 느린 모양이야. I guess this computer is slow
Sometimes ~(으)ㄴ/는 걸 보니까 is used earlier in  sentences with ~(으)ㄴ/는 모양이다 in order to express the basis upon which the guess or inference is made.   모양 literally means “shape” or “appearance." ~(으)ㄴ/는 모양이다 cannot describe something the speaker did herself or himself.   Nor can it be used when the basis for the guess or inference is not a fact.   So, it cannot be used for subjective feelings or beliefs.   Instead, ~(으)ㄹ 것 같다 is usually more appropriate in those contexts.
-neun (eu)n/eul jul arda/ moreudada   I think, I know
Formation (present tense)Verb stem + -는 줄 알다 (past tense)Verb stem + -ㄴ 줄 알다 (future tenseVerb stem + -ㄹ/을 줄 알다 )
-neun (eu)n/eul jul arassda/ morrassda   I thought, I knew
줄 알았다 I thought that But we can also use this structure to mean "to have known something," so the meaning changes depending on the intonation of the sentence in which we use this structure.
For example, we can translate 집에 있는 줄 알다 in two different ways. When the emphasis is on 알다 ("to know"), the sentence means "to know that he/she is at home," and when the emphasis is on 집에 있는 ("to be at home"), the sentence means "to wrongly think that he/she is at home." So it is important to pay attention to the intonation of the sentence when you use this structure.
Sentences
아무도 안 올 줄 알았어요. amudo an ol jul arasseoyo. "I thought nobody would come."
오늘이 일요일인 줄 알았어요. oneul-i iryoil-in jul arasseoyo. "I thought it was Sunday today."
저만 늦은 줄 알았어요. jeo-man neujeun jul arasseoyo. "I thought I was the only one who was late."
그렇게 하면 안 되는 줄 알았어요. geureoke hamyeon an doeneun jul arasseoyo. "I thought I wasn't supposed to do that."
시험이 어려울 줄 알았어요. siheom-i eoryeo-ul jul arasseoyo. "I thought the exam would be difficult."
Notes We can replace 알다with 모르다 ("to not know") to mean "do not know that..." For Example: 1. 시험이 어려울 줄 알았어요. "I thought the exam would be difficult." 2. 시험이 어려울 줄 몰랐어요. "I didn't know the exam would be difficult." 3. 시험이 어려울 줄 알았어요. (with emphasis on 알았어요) "I knew the exam would be difficult." 시험이 어려울 거라고 생각 안 했어요. "I didn't think the exam would be difficult
..neunji moreugessda   htsk 30Not sure
저는 친구가 어디 가는지 몰라요 = I don’t know where my friend is going
It is also worth pointing out here that the future tense ~겠다 is commonly added to 모르다 in these types of sentences. When 모르다 is used like this (as “모르겠다”), it does not have a future tense meaning. Rather, it is just a common (and slightly more polite) way to say that one “does not know something.” Therefore, it would be more common to see the sentence above written/spoken as:
저는 친구가 어디 가는지 모르겠어요 = I don’t know where my friend is going
-나 보다 [-na bo-da]= I assume, I suppose, I guess
Descriptive Verbs present-(으)ㄴ가 보다 [-(eu)n-ga bo-da] past 았/었/였나 봐요
Action verbs [present tense] Verb stem + -나 보다 [-na bo-da] [past tense] Verb stem + -았/었/였 + -나 보다 [-at/eot/yeot + -na bo-da]
-나 보다 is only used with action verbs. For descriptive verbs, you need to use a different structure, which we will introduce in the next lesson
This is usually only used when you are talking about people other than yourself. But when you talk about yourself using this -나 보다 structure, you are referring to yourself as a third person, making assumptions about why or how you have done something. Ex) I guess you don’t like coffee. Ex) I guess I never heard about it.
Conjugation  
하다 = to do 하 + -나 보다 = 하나 보다 [ha-na bo-da] = I guess they do + something → [present tense] 하나 봐요. → [past tense] 했나 봐요 (For future tense, you need to use a different structure,.)
Examples: 모르다 [mo-reu-da] = to not know 모르나 봐요. [mo-reu-na bwa-yo.] = I guess he(she/they) don’t know. [past tense] 몰랐나 봐요. [mol-lat-na bwa-yo.] = I guess he(she/they) didn’t know.
없다 [eop-da] = to be not there, to not exist 없나 봐요. [eop-na bwa-yo.] = I guess he(she/they/it) is not there. [past tense] 없었나 봐요. [eop-seot-na bwa-yo.] = I guess he(she/they/it) wasn’t there.
재미있다 [jae-mi-it-da] = to be fun, to be interesting 재미있나 봐요. [jae-mi-it-na bwa-yo.] = I guess it’s fun. / I suppose it’s interesting. [past tense] 재미있었나 봐요. [jae-mi-i-sseot-na bwa-yo.] = I guess it was fun.
사다 [sa-da] = to buy 사나 봐요. [sa-na bwa-yo.] [past tense] 샀나 봐요. [sat-na bwa-yo.] = I guess he(she/they) bought.
sentences: 효진 씨는 아직 모르나 봐요. [hyo-jin ssi-neun a-jik mo-reu-na bwa-yo.] = I guess Hyojin still doesn’t know.
아무도 없나 봐요. [a-mu-do eop-na bwa-yo.] = I guess there’s no one there.
고장났나 봐요. [go-jang-nat-na bwa-yo.] = I guess it broke
descriptive verbs-(으)ㄴ가 보다 [-(eu)n-ga bo-da]
예쁘다 → 예쁜가 보다 (I guess it’s pretty …) 비싸다 → 비싼가 보다 (I guess it’s expensive …) 작다 → 작은가 보다 (I guess it’s small …)
For -이다 [-i-da] (= to be): -이다 changes to -인가 보다
* Note that -이다 is not a descriptive verb on its own but it is usually combined with nouns to make a descriptive statement, so it is followed by -ㄴ가 보다.
Commonly accepted exceptions and irregularities Even though the rule is that action verbs are followed by -나 보다 and descriptive verbs are followed by -(으)ㄴ가 보다, Korean people often use -나 보다 for descriptive verbs too, when the verb stem ends with a last consonant. You can’t use -(으)ㄴ가 보다 for action verbs, but you will often hear Korean people using -나 보다 with descriptive verbs.
Ex) 작다 [jak-da] = to be small Originally, 작 has to be followed by -(으)ㄴ가 보다 because it is a descriptive verb. 작은가 보다 [ja-geun-ga bo-da] = I guess it’s small. But people often say 작나 보다 [jak-na bo-da] to mean the same thing
Exceptions When the descriptive verb is composed of a noun and the verb 있다 [it-da] or 없다 [eop-da], i.e. 재미있다, 맛있다, 재미없다 or 맛없다, you need to add -나 봐요 after 있 or 없. 재미있다 → 재미있나 봐요 / 재미있었나 봐요
sentences
학생이 많아요. [hak-saeng-i ma-na-yo.] = There are a lot of students. → 학생이 많은가 봐요. [hak-saeng-i ma-neun-ga bwa-yo.] = I guess there are a lot of students. → 학생이 많았나 봐요. [hak-saeng-i ma-nat-na bwa-yo.] = I guess there were a lot of students. 요즘 바빠요. [yo-jeum ba-ppa-yo.] = He’s busy these days. → 요즘 바쁜가 봐요. [yo-jeum ba-ppeun-ga bwa-yo.] = I guess he’s busy these days. → 바빴나 봐요. [ba-ppat-na bwa-yo.] = I guess he was busy.
그래요. [geu-rae-yo.] = It is so. That’s right. → 그런가 봐요. [geu-reon-ga bwa-yo.] = I guess so.
이쪽이 더 빨라요. [i-jjo-gi deo ppal-la-yo.] = This way is faster. → 이쪽이 더 빠른가 봐요. [i-jjo-gi deo ppa-reun-ga bwa-yo.] = I guess this way is faster
-(으)려나 보다  i guess it will...For future Construction:
Action Verbs: -(으)려나 보다
expressing your assumption about a future action that you “assume” someone is going to take or something that you “assume” will happen. For a similar meaning, you can use -(으)ㄹ 것 같다, but -(으)ㄹ 것 같다 generally has a stronger meaning than -(으)려나 보다, and you sound more certain of your statement when you use -(으)ㄹ 것 같다.  
Examples: 닫다 [dat-da] = to close 닫 + -으려나 보다 = 닫으려나 보다 → 닫으려나 봐요. [da-deu-ryeo-na bwa-yo.] = I guess they are going to close it. / It looks like they want to close it.
* 닫을 것 같아요. [da-deul geot ga-ta-yo.] = I think they will close it.
걸어가다 [geo-reo-ga-da] = to walk somewhere 걸어가 + -려나 보다 = 걸어가려나 보다 → 걸어가려나 봐요. [geo-reo-ga-ryeo-na bwa-yo.] = It looks like he is going to walk there.
* 걸어갈 것 같아요. [geo-reo gal geot ga-ta-yo.] = I think he will walk there.
** Note that you cannot use -(으)려나 보다 for descriptive verbs, since you can’t have an intention for “being” in a state. You can talk about “becoming + adjective” or about your effort for getting in a certain state, but not for generally describing a state that you ARE definitely in.
sentences
카페 문을 닫으려나 봐요. [ka-pe mu-neul da-deu-ryeo-na bwa-yo.] [Original verb: 닫다 = to close] = It looks like they are going to close the cafe. 지금 시작하려나 봐요. [ ji-geum si-ja-ka-ryeo-na bwa-yo.] [Original verb: 시작하다 = to start] = It looks like they are going to start now.
-게 되어 있다 (-ge doe-eo itda). This structure literally means that something is "built to be in a certain way"
알다 (alda) "to know" 알 + 게 되어 있다 = 알게 되어 있다 (alge doe-eo itda) "to be bound to know"
때가 되면 알게 되어 있어요. ttae-ga doemyeon alge doe-eo isseoyo. "You will naturally get to know it when time comes."
열심히 하는 사람은 성공하게 되어 있어요. yeolsimhi haneun saram-eun seonggong-hage doe-eo isseoyo. "Those who work hard are bound to be successful."
아이들은 저절로 크게 되어 있어요. aideul-eun jeojeollo keuge doe-eo isseoyo. "Children are bound to grow well on their own. (So don't worry too much about them.)"
-고 들었다-go deureotda I heard that-.
The main verb is 듣다 (deutda), which means "to listen" or "to hear." … 고 (...go) is a verb ending that works like quotation marks. We usually use the verb 들었다 (deureotda) in the past tense to mean "I heard," and together, ...고 들었다 (go deureotda) means "I heard that..."
Formation ( what you heard) + 고 들었다.
"이 책이 재미있다."  i chaeki naemiitda - "This book is interesting."
이 책이 재미있다 + 고 들었다   -> 이 책이 재미있다고 들었다. i chaeki naemiitdago deureotda
I heard that this book is interesting.
"그는 한국에 갔다."  geuneun hangeuke gatda - "He went to Korea."
그는 한국에 갔다 + 고 들었다 -> 그는 한국에 갔다고 들었다. geuneun hangeuke gatdago deureotda
I heard that he went to Korea.
Note: When quoting a phrase, we use -(ㄴ)다고 ((n)dago) for almost all verbs, but the verb 이다 (ida), which means "to be," takes the form of -(이)라고 ((i)rago). Since the future tense -ㄹ/을 것이다 (l/eul geos-ida) ends in 이다 (ida), the sentence ends in -(이)라고 들었다 ((i)rago deureotda).
Sentences
Past tense:
서울에도 눈 왔다고 들었어. seoul-e-do nun watdago deureosseo. "I heard that it was snowing in Seoul, too."
Future tense:
서울에도 눈 올 거라고 들었어. seoul-e-do nun ol geo-rago deureosseo. "I heard that it would snow in Seoul, too."
-는 줄 알다, -는 줄 모르다-neun jul alda, -neun jul moreuda didn't know that, I thought
The ending verb is usually 알다 (alda - to know) or 모르다 (moreuda - do not know) and it follows -ㄴ/은/는 줄 (n/eun/neun jul). So the entire structure means "to know/not know that ..." or "to think/not expect that ..."
Formation Verb stem + ㄴ/은/는 줄 알다/모르다 (n/eun/neun jul alda/moreuda)
Present Tense, use -ㄴ/는 줄 알다/모르다 Past Tense, use -ㄴ/은 줄 알다/모르다.
present)
저를 기다리는 줄 몰랐어요. (jeo-reul gidarineun jul mollasseoyo) "I didn't know you were waiting for me."
past 저를 기다린 줄 몰랐어요. (jeo-reul gidarin jul mollasseoyo) "I didn't know you had waited for me."
Sentences
내일이 일요일인 줄 몰랐어요. naeil-i ilyoil-in jul mollasseoyo. "I didn't know it was Sunday tomorrow."
어제가 일요일인 줄 몰랐어요. eoje-ga ilyoil-in jul mollasseoyo. "I didn't know it was Sunday yesterday."
어제가 일요일인 줄 알았어요. eoje-ga ilyoil-in jul arasseoyo. "I thought it was Sunday yesterday."
두 사람이 같이 가는 줄 몰랐어요. du saram-i gachi ganeun jul mollasseoyo. "I didn't know the two of them were going together."
두 사람이 같이 가는 줄 알았어요. du saram-i gachi ganeun jul arasseoyo. "I thought the two of them were going together."
두 사람이 같이 간 줄 몰랐어요. du saram-i gachi gan jul mollasseyo. "I thought the two of them had gone together."
Notes When using -ㄴ/은 줄 알다 in the past tense, it is mostly translated as "I thought it had been ..." or "I thought it was..." and when you wanted to say "I knew it was..." or "I knew it had been" more clearly, you can say -ㄴ/은 줄 알고 있다, although it can still mean either one depending on the intonation of the speaker. Ex) 내 생일인 줄 알았어? (nae saeng-il-in jul arasseo?) "Did you think it was my birthday?" Ex) 내 생일인 줄 알고 있었어? (nae saeng-il-in jul algo isseosseo?) "Did you know that it was my birthday?"
-야 할지 모르다-ya halji moreuda don't know whether or not should do something
Formation
Noun(을/를) + 할지 모르다 [halji moreuda] "not know whether (subject) would do (noun)" Verb Stem + (어/아/여)야 할지 모르다
돌아가다 [dolagada]"to return / to go back" 돌아가 + 야 할지 모르다 돌아가야 할지 모르다 "do not know whether or not I should return (go back)"
하다 [hada]"to do" 하 + 어야 할지 모르다 해야(하어야) 할지 모르다 "do not know whether or not I should do it"
Sentences
차가 막혀서 다시 돌아가야 할지 모르겠네... Chaga makhyeoseo dasi dolagaya halji moreugetne... "Because of heavy traffic, I do not know whether or not (we should) go back the way we came..."
이 드라마를 봐야 할지 안 봐야 할지 모르겠네... I deuramareul bwaya halji an bwaya halji moreugetne... "I am not sure whether or not I should watch this T.V. show..."
이것을 해야 할지 안 해야 할지 모르겠네... 아버지께 물어볼까? Igeoseul haeya halji an haeya halji moreugetne... abeojikke muleobokka? "I do not know whether or not I should do this...Should I ask my dad about this"
Notes Noun(을/를) + 할지 모르다 [halji moreuda] "not know whether (subject) would do (noun)"
허락 [heorak] "permission" 허락(을) + 할지 모르다 허락을 할지 모르다 "not know whether or not (subject) will give me permission"
수업 [su-eop] "a lesson / class" 수업(을) + 할지 모르다 수업을 할지 모르다 "not sure whether or not (subject) will start a lesson"
판매 [panmae] "sales" 판매(를) + 할지 모르다 판매를 할지 모르다 "not know whether or not (subject) will go on sale"
-(으/느)ㄴ지 잘 모르겠어요- I’m not sure if …
Present Tense = -(으/느)ㄴ지 잘 모르겠어요. Past Tense = -았/었/였는지 잘 모르겠어요. Future Tense = -(으)ㄹ지 잘 모르겠어요. = -(으)ㄹ 건지 잘 모르겠어요.
The word for “to be sure” or “to be certain” in Korean is 확실하다 [hwak-si-ra-da]. Therefore, the literal translation of “to not be sure” is 확실하지 않다 [hwak-si-ra-ji an-ta], but this form is not commonly used in everyday spoken Korean.
Are you sure?” When asking someone if they are sure or certain of something, you can still use the word 확실 하다 and say “확실해요?” [hwak-si-rae-yo?]. Or, sometimes you can say “정말이에요?” [jeongma-ri-e-yo?] “Are you serious?” or “Is that real?”.
“I’m not sure” The most natural Korean expression for “I’m not sure” is “잘 모르겠어요” [jal mo-reu-ge-sseoyo]. The word 모르다 means “to not know” 잘 몰라요” it means “I don’t know well.” or “I don’t know much (about it).” The suffix -겠- adds the nuance of assumption or intention (-겠- .), so 모르겠어요, you mean “I don’t seem to know” or “I would like to know, but I really don’t.” 잘 모르겠어요 means the same thing as 모르겠어요 because you don’t actually need the word “잘” there, but “잘 모르겠어요” is a common and fixed expression used by many Korean people to mean “I’m not sure” or “I don’t know for sure.
You can use interrogative words (when/what/where/how/who/why/which) with this structure, too.
Present Tense = -(으/느)ㄴ지 잘 모르겠어요.
이거 누구 책인지 잘 모르겠어요. [i-geo nu-gu chae-gin-ji jal mo-reu-ge-sseo-yo.] = I’m not sure whose book this is.
Past Tense = -았/었/였는지 잘 모르겠어요.
다 끝났는지 잘 모르겠어요. [da kkeut-nat-neun-ji jal mo-reu-ge-sseo-yo.] = I’m not sure if it all ended
Future Tense = -(으)ㄹ지 잘 모르겠어요. = -(으)ㄹ 건지 잘 모르겠어요.
서점이 내일 문을 열지 잘 모르겠어요. [seo-jeo-mi nae-il mu-neul yeol-ji jal mo-reu-ge-sseo-yo.] = I’m not sure if the bookstore will open tomorrow. if you want to add “or not” at the end, you can use the structure Verb stem + -(으/느)ㄴ지 + Verb stem + 안 -(으/는)ㄴ지.
어디로 갈지 잘 모르겠어요. [eo-di-ro gal-ji jal mo-reu-ge-sseo-yo.] = I’m not sure where we will go.
내일 만날지 안 만날지 잘 모르겠어요. [nae-il man-nal-ji an man-nal-ji jal mo-reu-ge-sseo-yo.] = I’m not sure if we will meet tomorrow or not.
[mwol hae-ya doel-ji jal mo-reu-ge-sseo-yo.] = I am not sure what to do. = I am not sure what I (will) have to do.
이게 무슨 뜻인지 잘 모르겠어요. [i-ge mu-seun tteu-sin-ji jal mo-reu-ge-sseo-yo.] = I’m not sure what this means.
-겠다 (-gaetda) Must be
Formation Verb Stem + 겠다
It must be used in the declarative, and solely with descriptive verbs. This grammatical structure is regarded as in the intimate politeness level.
As this structure indicates the speakers supposition, it is never used to make a supposition of oneself.
This structure can be translated as "must be," "is probably," "I guess."
Verb Stem + 겠다
Example: hada hagessda
힘들겠다.
Sentences
와! 그 케이크 맛있겠다! (wa! geu keikeu masitgetda!) - Wow, that cake must be delicious! (I bet that cake is delicious!)
Related Expressions Future Indicati
0 notes